30282

Multiplex ROYALevo9 Handleiding

16
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/110
Pagina verder
Instruction
s
MULTIPLEX Modellsport GmbH & Co. KG z Westliche Gewerbestraße 1 z D-75015 Bretten
© MULTIPLEX 2008, Printed in Germany
www.multiplex-rc.de
# (9)85 5327 (08-11-19-MiWa) D Esser
19.11.2008 1
1. Contents
1. Contents 1
2. Introduction 5
2.1. The ROYAL
pro
philosophy...................... 6
2.2. Arrangement of the instructions ............. 6
3. Safety Notes 7
3.1. General safety notes................................. 7
3.2. Range checking......................................... 9
4. Liability / Compensation 10
5. Guarantee 10
6. CE Conformity Declaration 10
7. Specification 11
7.1. Note regarding channels /
frequencies ............................................. 11
7.2. Frequency table....................................... 11
8. The Transmitter Battery 12
8.1. Safety Notes............................................. 12
8.2. Charging the transmitter battery ........... 12
8.3. The correct method of charging ............ 12
8.4. ROYAL
pro
battery management ........... 13
8.4.1. Self-discharge 13
8.4.2. Unchanged features 13
8.4.3. This is important 13
8.5. Terms used in battery charging............. 14
8.5.1. Normal charging … 14
8.5.2. Fast charging … 14
8.5.3. Trickle charging … 14
8.6. Replacing the transmitter battery.......... 14
8.7. Transmitter battery care and storage.... 14
8.8. Recycling ................................................. 14
9. The Transmitter 15
9.1. Front face of the transmitter .................. 15
9.2. Rear face of the transmitter ................... 16
9.3. Interior of the transmitter ....................... 16
9.4. Mechanical details................................... 17
9.4.1. Opening / closing the transmitter case 17
9.4.2. Adjusting / replacing the transmitter aerial 17
9.4.3. Removing / installing the RF module 17
9.4.4. Replacing the transmitter battery 18
9.4.5. Disabling the stick centring spring, activating
the ratchet / friction system 18
9.4.6. Adjusting the “hardness” of the sticks 18
9.4.7. Swivelling the stick units 18
9.4.8. Adjusting / replacing the stick tops 19
9.5. Plastic stick top with three buttons:
installation and functions...................... 19
9.6. Digital trims.............................................. 20
9.6.1. General information 20
9.6.2. Advantages of digital trims 20
9.6.3. The cruciform digital trims 20
9.6.4. On-screen trim display 20
10. Switching on, using the transmitter 21
10.1. Switching on for the first time................21
10.2. Switching on “normally”......................... 22
10.2.1. RF module excl. Scanner installed 22
10.2.2. RF module installed, Scanner installed 22
10.3. Switching on when no RF module is
installed ...................................................22
10.4. Switching the transmitter on with throttle-
check active.............................................22
10.4.1.
Throttle-check for fixed-wing models 22
10.4.2.
Throttle-check for model helicopters 23
10.5. Switching on to change the transmitter
frequency, or to use the Scanner..........23
10.6. The Status displays ................................. 24
10.6.1. Status display 1 (standard) 24
10.6.2. Status display 2 (flight phases) 24
10.6.3. Status display 3 (timers) 24
10.6.4. Status display 4 (system information) 24
11. The “ROYAL
pro
” philosophy 25
11.1. Operating the ROYAL
pro
.......................25
11.1.1. Using the keypad 25
11.1.2. Using buttons when operating a model 25
11.2. The ROYAL
pro
menu structure.............26
11.3. What do the sticks, sliders and switches
do? Or: Global assignments (lists).......26
11.3.1. What does “Assignment” mean? 26
11.3.2. What are transmitter controls? 26
11.3.3. What are switches? 27
11.3.4. Why “global” assignments? 27
11.3.5. Which assignment lists are available? 27
11.3.6. How are the assignment lists arranged? 28
11.3.7. How are the assignment lists used? 28
11.3.8. Summary: “Global assignments” 28
11.4. Global mixer definitions..........................28
11.4.1. Why “global” mixer definitions? 28
11.4.2. Which global mixers are available? 29
11.4.3. Mixer names with a “+” suffix 29
11.4.4. How are the free mixers used in fixed-wing model
aircraft? 29
11.4.5. How are mixers used in helicopters? 29
11.4.6. Summary of the “free mixers” 29
11.5. Model templates....................................... 29
11.5.1. Why are model templates needed? 29
11.5.2. What do the model templates contain? 30
11.5.3. Which model templates are available? 30
11.6. Servo configuration................................. 30
11.7. Servo calibration...................................... 30
11.7.1. What can be calibrated? 30
11.7.2. How is the calibration carried out? 31
11.7.3. Allocation - what’s that? 31
12. Setting up a fixed-wing model 32
12.1. The method in principle ..........................32
12.2. Setting up the new model in the
transmitter ...............................................32
ROYAL
pro
2
12.2.1. Menu I, call up New model 32
12.2.2. Which model memory will be used? 32
12.2.3. Selecting the Template 32
12.2.4. Selecting the servo configuration 32
12.2.5. Selecting the stick mode 33
12.2.6. Selecting the Assignment 33
12.2.7. Confirming with OK 33
12.2.8. Entering the model Name 34
12.3. Preparing the controls / switches.......... 34
12.3.1. Selecting / changing the idle position for spoiler /
throttle 34
12.3.2. Changing the switch ON position 35
12.4. Preparing servos ..................................... 35
12.4.1. Checking/changing the servo assignment 35
12.4.2. Checking/changing the direction of servo rotation 36
12.4.3. Calibrating servos = setting the centre and
maximum travels 36
12.5. Adjusting ailerons, and activating
landing aid (Mixer AILERON+) ................ 37
12.6. Differential aileron travel ........................ 38
12.6.1. Activating differential 38
12.6.2. Setting the differential value 38
12.7. Adjusting elevator, activating elevator
mixers (Mixer ELEVATR+)........................ 39
12.7.1. Spoiler to elevator = Spoiler compensation
(Spoiler input to ELEVATR+ mixer) 39
12.7.2. Throttle to elevator = Throttle compensation
(Thr -Tr input to ELEVATR+ mixer) 39
12.8. Activating inboard flaps (camber-
changing flaps) (Mixer FLAP+)............... 39
12.8.1. Activating the Spoiler input in the mixer
FLAP+ (Butterfly) 40
12.8.2. Activating the Flap input in the mixer FLAP+
(camber-changing flaps) 40
12.8.3. Activating the Aileron input in the
FLAP+ mixer (aileron support by the inboard
(camber-changing) flaps) 40
12.8.4. Activating the Elevator-Tr (Ele -Tr) input
in the FLAP+ mixer (snap-flap) 41
12.9. V-tail models ............................................ 41
12.9.1. Assigning V-tail servos 41
12.9.2. Activating the mixer V-TAIL+
41
12.9.3. Checking/changing the direction of servo rotation 41
12.9.4. Adjusting the remaining inputs 42
12.10. Working with flight phases..................... 42
12.10.1. What is the purpose of switching between
different flight phases? 42
12.10.2. Default settings in the menu Flight phase 42
12.10.3. Assigning flight phase switches 42
12.10.4. Locking / unlocking flight phases 42
12.10.5. Copying flight phases 43
12.10.6. Changing flight phase names 43
12.10.7. Setting a transition time 43
12.11. Supplementary functions ....................... 44
12.11.1. D/R and Expo 44
12.11.2. Activating Combi-Switch 44
12.11.3. Motor run timer 44
13. Setting up a model helicopter 45
13.1. The method in principle .......................... 45
13.2. Setting up a New model in the Tx...........45
13.2.1. Menu I, call up New model 45
13.2.2. Which model memory will be used? 45
13.2.3. Selecting the template 45
13.2.4. Selecting the servo config(uration) 45
13.2.5. Selecting the stick Mode 46
13.2.6. Selecting the Assignment 46
13.2.7. Confirming with OK 46
13.2.8. Entering the model Name 47
13.3. Preparing the controls / switches ..........47
13.3.1. Checking / changing control settings for idle /
collective pitch min. and throttle limiter min. 47
13.3.2. Changing the switch ON positions and / or the
switch assignment 48
13.4. Checking / changing the servo
Assignment..............................................48
13.5. Checking / adjusting the main rotor ......49
13.5.1. Checking / changing the direction of rotation
of the rotor head servos 49
13.5.2. Calibrating servos = setting the centre and
maximum travels 49
13.6. Checking / adjusting the tail rotor..........50
13.6.1. Checking / changing the direction of rotation
of the tail rotor servo 50
13.6.2. The TAIL mixer 50
13.6.3. Offset value 51
13.6.4. Collective pitch to tail (Revo-Mix) 51
13.6.5. Mixer Zero point 51
13.6.6. Differential yaw (rudder) travel 51
13.7. Gyro...........................................................51
13.7.1. Parameter Type of Gyro 52
13.7.2. Adjusting gyro suppression 52
13.8. Throttle, and associated functions ........53
13.8.1. What is the meaning of the terms Limiter, Curve,
Throttle Min., Trim, DTC and Throttle cut? 53
13.8.2. Throttle for electric helicopters 54
13.8.3. Throttle for I.C. powered helicopters 54
13.9. Setting the collective pitch curve...........55
13.10. Working with Flight phases..................55
13.10.1. What is the purpose of switching between
different flight phases? 55
13.10.2. Default settings in the menu Flight phase 55
13.10.3. Assigning flight phase switches 56
13.10.4. Locking / unlocking flight phases 56
13.10.5. Copying flight phases 56
13.10.6. Changing flight phase names 56
13.10.7. Setting a transition time 57
14. Main menu ¡Setup 58
14.1. Menu Transmitter..................................58
14.1.1. Parameter Sound 58
14.1.2. Parameter group Safety 58
14.1.3. Parameter group Battery 58
14.1.4. Parameter group Display 59
14.2. Menu: Mixer def....................................59
14.2.1. Defining a free mixer 59
14.2.2. Method of working / options for the mixer inputs 59
14.2.3. Making mixer inputs switchable 61
14.3. Menu: Assignment...................................61
14.3.1. Sub-menu Assign.Controls 61
Manual
3
14.3.2. Sub-menu Assign.Switches 62
14.3.3. Special case Extra Sw. 62
14.4. Menu Training ....................................... 63
14.4.1. The ROYAL
pro
as Teacher transmitter 63
14.4.2. The ROYAL
pro
as Pupil transmitter 64
14.5. Menu User................................................ 65
14.5.1. Parameter PIN (access code) 65
14.5.2. Parameter Language 65
Parameter Name 65
15. Main menu ¢Control 66
15.1. Menu Control ................................. 66
15.2. Menu Control
................................. 67
15.3. Menu ¢TriggerPoint
.......... 67
15.4. Control menu screen layout................... 67
15.4.1. Parameter Trim 68
15.4.2. Parameter Step (Trim increment) 68
15.4.3. Parameter Mode (throttle trim) 68
15.4.4. Parameter D/R (Dual-Rate) 68
15.4.5. Parameter Trvl (Travel) 68
15.4.6. Parameter Expo 69
15.4.7. Parameter Fixed Value 69
15.4.8. Parameter Time 69
15.4.9. Parameter Limit 69
15.4.10. Parameter Collect. P1 ... P5 70
15.4.11. Parameter Throttle P1 ... P5 70
15.4.12. Parameter Throttle Min. (idle, throttle limiter) 71
16. Main menu £Mixer 71
16.1. Menu Mixer Fixed-wing models. 71
16.1.1. Combi-Sw. (Combi-Switch) 71
16.1.2. Ail.Diff. (aileron differential) 72
16.1.3. Controls Mix (transmitter control mixer) 72
16.1.4. Setting up free mixers 73
16.2. Menu: Mixer
Helicopters ............ 74
16.2.1. Comp. Mixer (compensation mixer) 74
16.2.2. Gyro (Gyro mixer) 74
16.2.3. TAIL (tail rotor mixer) 75
16.2.4. Rotor head (swashplate mixer) 76
17. Main menu Servo K 78
17.1. Menu Calibrate ..................................... 78
17.1.1. Sub-menus for individual servos 78
17.1.2. The procedure for calibrating a servo 79
17.2. Menu Assignment ................................... 79
17.2.1. ROYAL
pro
12 only: Special features relating to
servo 11 and / or servo 12 (PPM modulation) 80
17.2.2. Non-MULTIPLEX receivers with ten channels 80
17.3. Menu Monitor.......................................... 80
17.4. Menu: Test run ....................................... 80
18. Main menu Timer A 81
18.1. Slot, Sum and Interval timers:
display and reset.....................................81
18.2. Menu ¥Timer, Model for flight time
per season / session ..............................81
18.2.1. Summary Timer Model 81
18.3. Menu ¥Timer, |Slot............................81
18.3.1. Example: monitoring the slot time (time limit) 82
18.3.2. Summary: Timer 1 |Slot 82
18.4. Menu ¥Timer, ´Sum..............................82
18.4.1. Example: recording motor run time 82
18.4.2. Summary Timer 2 ´Sum 83
18.5. Menu ¥Timer, ¶¶Interval ................... 83
18.5.1. Example: Monitoring motor run time per climb 83
18.5.2. Summary Timer 3 ¶¶Interval 84
18.6. Total transmitter operating time ............ 84
19. Main menu Memo I 84
19.1. Selecting a model memory ..................... 84
19.2. Copying a model memory.......................85
19.3. Erasing model memories........................85
19.4. Managing Flight phases .......................85
19.4.1. Selecting flight phase names 86
19.4.2. Locking / unlocking flight phases 86
19.4.3. Copying flight phases 86
19.4.4. Setting the flight phase transition time 87
19.5. Checking / changing the Properties
of the current model memory ................ 87
19.5.1. What is displayed? 87
19.5.2. What can be changed? 87
19.6. Setting up a New model............................ 87
19.7. Menu: Modulation .................................. 88
20. Special facilities 88
20.1. Using the 3-D digi-adjuster to alter
settings in flight ......................................88
20.2. Diagnosis mode operations ...................89
20.3. PC data back-up / updating ....................89
20.4. Using a flight simulator........................... 90
20.5. Error messages........................................ 90
20.6. Accessories..............................................90
20.6.1. HFM-S M-PCM/PPM Synthesizer RF module 90
20.6.2. Scanner for HFM-S M-PCM/PPM
Synthesizer RF module 90
20.6.3. Trainer lead 91
20.6.4. Diagnosis lead 91
20.6.5. Aluminium stick top with switch or button -
installation and functions 91
20.6.6. Retro-fitting switches K and / or P 93
20.6.7. Additional accessories, replacement parts 93
ROYAL
pro
4
21. Model templates in detail 94
21.1. Fixed-wing model aircraft....................... 94
21.1.1. BASIC model template 95
21.1.2. ACRO model template 96
21.1.3. HOTLINER model template 97
21.1.4. DELTA model template 99
21.1.5. GLIDER model template 100
21.1.6. 4 FLAPS model template 101
21.2. Model helicopters .................................. 104
21.2.1. HELImech model template 104
21.2.2. HELIccpm model template 104
21.3. Servo configurations............................. 105
22. Appendix: “global” lists 107
22.1. Global transmitter control and switch
assignments.......................................... 107
22.2. Pre-set mixers........................................ 108
23. Care and maintenance 109
24. Disposal 109
25. Advice and Service 109
Manual
5
2. Introduction
We are delighted that you have decided to purchase
the MULTIPLEX ROYAL
pro
radio control system.
The ROYAL
pro
is the result of a consistent programme
of development through the ROYAL series. The new
ROYAL
pro
retains many familiar and proven features
from the ROYALevo in combination with new features
suggested and requested by our large circle of users.
Transmission
x Modern HFM-S M-PCM/PPM Synthesizer RF mo-
dule with convenient menu-based method of
changing channels
x Channel display and security query when switching
on, Channel-Check / Scanner as retro-fit option *
x Newly developed M-PCM modulation offering
twelve fast, high-resolution servo channels
*Options:
See the main MULTIPLEX catalogue for available fre-
quencies.
Operation
x Digital trim system
easily accessible cruciform trim buttons, trims spe-
cific to each flight phase, clearly arranged graphic
on-screen trim display, audible support, variable
trim increments
x Voltage display and battery monitor with variable
warning threshold (battery voltage) and audible
alarm
x Battery management system
Transmitter battery monitor with display of residual
charge in mAh, plus calculated display of remain-
ing operating time in hours
x Servo monitor
with graphic or numerical display, for checking
model settings
x Code lock PIN (4-digit) for securing the transmitter
against unauthorised data access
Hardware
x Modern, ergonomically efficient case design with
ultra-precise, individually variable, swivelling ball-
raced stick units for use hand-held or in a tray
x Graphics-capable folding screen (132 x 64 pixels)
with variable contrast
x Modern FLASH processor technology; simple up-
date via the Internet when new software versions
become available
x MULTIPLEX multi-function socket fitted as stan-
dard: acts as charge socket, Trainer mode inter-
face, PC interface (PC update, data back-up, flight
simulator)
x Selective Trainer mode operations
facilities provided as standard; unique Quick-
Select control assignment
x Timers for total transmitter operating time and
model operating time (model-specific)
Programming
x Clearly designed, efficiently structured menus for
simple programming
x Optional keypad or two 3-D digi-adjusters for pro-
gramming
x Clear text menu system, screen texts can be dis-
played in various national languages
Model-specific settings
x Flight phase switching
With up to four flight phases for fixed-wing models
and helicopters, variable transition time
x Dual-Rate and Expo, variable for each flight phase
separately
x Five-point servo adjustment
Servo travel right / left, centre and two intermediate
adjustment points allow compensation for linkage
inaccuracies and mechanical travel discrepancies
x Three timers (slot, sum, interval)
With variable alarm time and audible alarm
x Separate timer for the model’s total operating time
x Convenient model memory management
Unrestricted model names, up to sixteen charac-
ters, copy and erase functions
x Comprehensive set-up and mixer facilities for
fixed-wing model aircraft and helicopters
x Eight model templates cater for many different
model types and help to minimise the program-
ming effort required
Differences between transmitter versions:
ROYAL
pro
7 9 12
Channels
7 9 12
Model memories
15 20 36
We are confident that you will rapidly learn to appreciate
your ROYAL
pro
once you have taken a little time to
familiarise yourself with its facilities. These operating
instructions are intended to guide you through this
process. The system will give your endless hours of
pleasure in our mutual and fascinating hobby of model
sport.
Yours - the MULTIPLEX team
ROYAL
pro
6
2.1. The ROYAL
pro
philosophy
At the design stage of the ROYAL
pro
we placed par-
ticular emphasis on high-level user-friendliness, flexi-
bility and maximum standardisation.
The user-friendly aspect results from the clearly ar-
ranged menu structure, the informative and well laid-
out menus and the large number of useful “little
touches” which make it easier to program and use the
transmitter.
The transmitter’s flexibility is due to a combination of
two features: the large number of facilities which are
pre-defined and ready to use, and the ability to vary
almost all of them exactly as you wish. Transmitter
controls (sticks, sliders and switches) and servos can
be assigned without restriction, and the pre-defined
mixers can be modified in any way you like.
You can create your own “standard” by fine-tuning the
pre-defined mixers and assignment lists to suit your
personal preferences and applications.
Standardisation makes it easier and more intuitive to
program the transmitter. Pre-defined model templates,
mixers and assignment lists ensure that you can set
up a new model memory with just a few button-
presses, and it is then ready for immediate use.
Chapter “11. The ROYAL
pro
philosophy” describes
the background to the system and related facilities,
and is intended to help you understand the way the
transmitter works. It is therefore particularly important
to read this section.
2.2. Arrangement of the instructions
In addition to other subjects, Part 1 (Chapters 1. to
10.) contains important information on the subject of
safety !. This section also includes all the informa-
tion you need concerning the transmitter’s hardware.
Essential reading!
Part 2 (Chapter 11.) concentrates on the HOW and
WHY of the ROYAL
pro
’s wide-ranging software func-
tions. This background information makes it much
easier to understand the sequence of operations
when programming the transmitter.
Part 3 and Part 4 describe step by step how to pro-
gram a fixed-wing model aircraft and a model heli-
copter.
First the basic functions (aileron, elevator, rudder,
throttle / collective pitch, roll, pitch, yaw) are “brought
into play”.
After this the text explains the essential steps required
to expand and refine the model’s functions.
Part 5 contains a detailed description of all the
menus, the model templates, the default transmitter
control settings, the switch assignments and much
more.
Arrangement of the instructions
Chapter
Part 1
Introduction
Safety notes
Specification
Notes on the transmitter battery
Transmitter hardware
Switching on for the first time
2.
3.
7.
8.
9.
10.
!
!
Part 2
The “ROYAL
pro
” philosophy
Buttons and 3-D digi-adjusters ...
... when programming
... when operating the model
... when switching on
Global assignments
Global mixers
Model templates
11.
Part 3
Programming a fixed-wing model
Preparing the transmitter
Preparing the model
Setting up the basic functions
Supplementary functions
12.
Part 4
Programming a model helicopter
Preparing the transmitter
Preparing the model
Setting up the basic functions
Supplementary functions
13.
Part 5
Reference
All the menus in detail
Trainer mode operations
Overviews
14. - 19.
14.4. + 20.6.3.
21. + 22.
!
This character indicates chapters which are
safety-related. It is essential to read and observe
these sections!
Manual
7
3. Safety Notes
! These operating instructions are an integral
part of the product, and contain important in-
formation and safety notes. Please store them
in a safe place, and be sure to pass them on
to the new owner if you ever dispose of the
product.
! Observe the safety notes!
Read the instructions carefully!
Do not switch the system on until you have
studied these operating instructions and the
safety notes which follow (either included in
the instructions, or supplied separately).
! Warning!
Radio-controlled models are not playthings in
the usual sense of the term. The construction,
the installation of the RC system and the
method of operating the models require tech-
nical expertise, care and responsible, safety-
conscious behaviour. Errors and neglect can
result in serious damage or injury. However,
since we as manufacturers have no means of
ensuring that you build and operate your
models competently, all we can do is express-
ly point out these hazards. We deny all liability.
A model which goes out of control, for what-
ever reason, can cause severe personal injury
and serious damage to property. It is fun-
damentally essential that you take out suit-
able insurance to cover this risk.
! Under no circumstances is it permissible to
carry out technical modifications to your ra-
dio control system. Use genuine MULTIPLEX
accessories and replacement parts ex-
clusively; this applies in particular to the
transmitter battery, aerial, expansion units,
additional hardware items, …).
! If you operate the transmitter in conjunction
with products made by other manufacturers,
it is up to you to ensure that they are of good
quality and work properly. Every time you set
up a new or modified chain of products, you
must ensure that all the functions work prop-
erly, and carry out a range check before flying
the model. Do not be tempted to fly the model
if something is not in order: first seek out the
problem and eliminate it.
! Have your radio control equipment (especially
transmitters and receivers) checked at regular
intervals (every two or three years) by an
authorised MULTIPLEX Service Centre.
! Operate your transmitter only within the per-
missible temperature range (Î 7.). Please
note that condensation can form inside the
transmitter if it is subjected to a rapid change
of temperature (e.g. warm car, cold flying
field). Damp has an adverse effect on the op-
eration of the transmitter and any other elec-
tronic items.
If damp is present in any electrical device,
cease operations immediately, disconnect the
power source, and allow the unit to dry out
thoroughly, preferably with the case open.
This may take several days. After this, carry
out a thorough check of its operation. If you
have the slightest doubt, send the device to
an authorised MULTIPLEX Service Centre for
checking.
! This radio control system may only be oper-
ated legally on particular channels / transmit-
ter frequencies, which vary from country to
country. In some regions official formalities
have to be completed before the system can
be used. Please read the notes included with
the system.
! Always program a new model at home in
peace, and check all functions carefully. Make
sure you are familiar with the methods of
programming and using the transmitter be-
fore you operate your model outdoors.
! Always keep to the correct sequence when
switching on and off, as this avoids the pos-
sibility of the power system switching itself
on unexpectedly: this can be a serious haz-
ard:
1. When switching on:
first switch transmitter ON,
then switch receiver ON,
then connect flight / drive battery
or switch power system ON.
2. When switching off:
first disconnect flight / drive battery
or switch power system OFF,
then switch receiver OFF,
then switch transmitter OFF.
3.1. General safety notes
Build your model carefully:
x Install and adjust all control surface linkages in
such a way that the surfaces move smoothly and
freely, and are not stalled at maximum travel. Don’t
limit servo travels at the transmitter; it is always
better to adjust the system mechanically, i.e. the
horns, levers and pushrods. Avoid lost motion
(sloppy linkages). These measures are essential in
order to minimise the load on the servos. This in
turn allows them to perform at their best, and they
will also last longer and operate more reliably.
x Provide effective protection from vibration to the
receiver, battery, servos and other RC and elec-
tronic components (danger of electronic com-
ponent failure!). Read and observe the advice in-
cluded in the appropriate operating instructions.
Of course, this also includes the avoidance of
vibration in the first place: balance propellers and
rotor blades before use, and replace them at any
sign of damage. Install I.C. engines on vibration-
absorbing mounts, and replace motors, engines
and motor parts which are damaged or do not run
true.
ROYAL
pro
8
x Do not place leads under tension or kink them;
protect them from rotating parts.
x Avoid unnecessarily long or superfluous servo ex-
tension leads. Leads longer than about 30 to 50
cm should be fitted with separation filters (ferrite
ring # 8 5131 or separation filter lead # 8 5035),
and must be of adequate conductor cross-section
(voltage loss). We recommend at least 0.3 mm
2
.
x Do not shorten or coil up the receiver aerial. Never
deploy the aerial parallel to conductive parts such
as metal pushrods, or inside fuselages with a
shielding effect (made of or reinforced with carbon
fibre, metallic painted finish). Do not lay the aerial
on electrically conductive model components.
Whip aerials are recommended for large-scale
model aircraft. Read the instructions supplied
with your receiver!
x Ensure that the receiver power supply is of ade-
quate capacity. For servos up to about 40 Ncm
torque you can estimate the required battery ca-
pacity using the following formula:
Capacity [mAh] >
Servo count x 200 mAh
If in doubt, always use the next larger size of bat-
tery unless weight or space make this impossible.
x Moving parts made of conductive materials (e.g.
metal linkage components or pushrods) must not
be allowed to touch each other. They produce
metal-to-metal “noise” interference which has an
adverse effect on radio reception.
x Interference caused by static charge and powerful
electrical or electro-magnetic fields should be
avoided by suitable suppression measures (e.g.
suppress brushed electric motors with suitable ca-
pacitors, fit petrol engines with shielded sparkplug
connectors, suppress ignition leads and ignition
units), and keep such items well away from the RC
system, the receiver aerial, wiring and batteries.
x Maintain an adequate distance between high-
current cables (e.g. electric power system leads)
and all the receiving system components. In par-
ticular, the leads between brushless electric mo-
tors and their speed controllers should be kept as
short as possible (guideline: max. 10 to 15 cm).
x The receiver can be shielded from interference
generated by speed controllers by the use of sup-
pressor filters (ferrite ring # 8 5146 or suppressor
filter lead # 8 5057).
Check your model at regular intervals:
x Ensure that control surfaces and their linkages
move freely, smoothly, and without lost motion.
x Ensure that pushrods, other linkages, hinges etc.
are stiff enough, and are in perfect condition.
x Carry out a visual check for fractures, cracks, pos-
sible shear points etc. on the model itself, and in its
components such as the RC and power systems.
x Check that all electrical leads and connectors are
in perfect condition, and are making sound contact.
x It is essential to examine the airborne power sup-
ply and its wiring at regular intervals. This includes
the switch harness, and the external condition of
the battery.
Regular maintenance also covers the battery (con-
ditioning by repeated charge / discharge cycles),
and regular checks of the voltage curve and ca-
pacity. This requires the use of a battery charger
and a charge process which is suitable for the type
of battery in use.
Pre-flight checks:
x Charge the transmitter, receiver and flight batteries
carefully, and ensure that they are in good condition
during pre-flight checks and between flights.
x At the flying field your first job is to check with the
other modellers present whether your own channel /
transmitter frequency is free. If there is a flight di-
rector or site warden, be sure to register with that
person, and make sure you understand the type of
frequency control in use.
Only then switch ON!
Ignore this, and you risk a “channel clash” (two
transmitters on the same frequency)!
x Carry out a range check with the transmitter aerial
fitted, but collapsed. (Î 3.2.).
x Ensure that the correct model memory is active.
x Check the function and effect of all primary and
secondary control systems.
! If you discover anything doubtful: do not fly!
Locate the fault, eliminate it, then check again.
When operating the model:
x If you have never flown a radio-controlled model, it
is really essential initially to ask an experienced
model pilot for help. A Trainer (buddy-box) system
is ideal for the first steps in learning to fly.
x Models should only be operated at suitable sites.
x Never fly or drive over or towards spectators.
x Do not carry out any high-risk flying or driving ma-
noeuvres.
x It is tempting to over-estimate your own ability and
skill. Don’t do it: keep within your limits.
x If you detect any sign of a problem or interference,
land or cease operations immediately.
x Caution: static electrical charges!
In extremely dry air (in mountainous terrain, in a
mountain bowl, close to weather fronts) static
charges tend to build up in the transmitter and / or
the pilot. The discharge takes the form of static
sparking, which can endanger the pilot, and cause
interference or damage to the transmitter.
Counter-measures:
Cease operations as quickly as possible, and walk
a little way down the mountain in order to find a
less exposed location.
Manual
9
x Keep at least 2 m away from mobile phones!
We recommend that you stand at least 2 m away
from mobile telephones when operating your mo-
del, as the high output of these devices may cause
interference to your transmitter or RF module. In
general terms we recommend that you switch off
mobile phones and any other equipment which
could affect the concentration of pilots.
ESD notes for electronic sub-assemblies:
The sub-assemblies of radio control trans-
mitters (main circuit board, RF module,
Channel-Check module, Scanner module)
are fitted with electrostatically sensitive
components. These parts can be destroyed or their
useful life shortened if static discharges take place
(potential equalisation through electro-static dis-
charge) when the sub-assembly is touched.
The following protective measures are essential if you
have to handle electrostatically sensitive sub-
assemblies:
x Before fitting or removing such assemblies, equal-
ise the potential difference between yourself and
your environment (e.g. by touching a heating radia-
tor).
x If necessary, open the main device and touch it
over a large area, in order to equalise the potential
relative to the base unit.
x Do not remove the sub-assembly from the conduc-
tive anti-static bag until you have equalised the po-
tential. Avoid touching electronic components or
solder pads directly. Hold the sub-assembly by the
edges of the circuit board only.
x Once removed from the basic device, the sub-as-
sembly should only be stored in the conductive
anti-static bag in which it was delivered. Never al-
low the sub-assembly to make direct contact with a
conventional, non-ESD compatible container made
of foam, Styrofoam or other plastic.
3.2. Range checking
Regular range checks are a very important method of
checking that your radio control system is working
properly, and of detecting changes to the radio sys-
tem’s transmission characteristics. A range check is
particularly important if:
x You install new components in a model, change
the components, or re-arrange their installation.
x You are using components in the model which
have previously been involved in a crash.
x You noticed any irregularity or problem when pre-
viously operating the model.
Important:
x Always carry out the range check with a second
person to help you; he or she can secure the mo-
del and watch what happens (ground vehicles and
boats on the appropriate surface).
x Range checks should only be carried out with the
telescopic aerial fitted to the transmitter, but col-
lapsed completely. Do not use a helical stub ae-
rial for range checking!
x During the range check there should be no other
transmitters switched on. Large-scale metallic ob-
jects such as cars and wire fences will also affect
the test result.
This is the procedure:
x Hold the transmitter in such a position that the ae-
rial is as close to vertical as possible.
Model aircraft:
Stand or hold the model in such a way that the tip
of the receiver aerial is about 1 m above the
ground.
Land-based or water-based models: place the
model on the ground or in the water.
Switch the power system OFF!
x Switch the transmitter and receiver on. Move one
control function (e.g. elevator) constantly and steadily.
This allows you to check that the receiving system
responds to control commands with distinct, regu-
lar movements of the control surfaces.
x Walk away from the model to increase the distance
between the transmitter and the receiving system.
You have reached the range limit when the servos
start to jitter, carry out uncontrolled movements, or
cease responding clearly and evenly to transmitter
control commands.
For standard receivers (without IPD or similar) this
rule applies:
For receivers which carry out no signal checking / cor-
rection (e.g. Pico 3/4, Pico 5/6) slight servo jitter when
close to the range limit is acceptable.
For receivers with IPD, PCM or similar, this rule applies:
If the receiver checks / corrects the signal, it will sup-
press any servo jitter. At the range limit the servo
movements will initially become irregular (faltering
movement). Beyond the range limit the servos will
switch to HOLD mode (maintaining the last com-
manded position) or FAIL-SAFE mode (running to a
pre-programmed position).
!
Repeat the check with the motor running!
Secure the model, and repeat the check with the mo-
tor running. Test the system at various throttle posi-
tions between idle and full-throttle.
Effective range must not be significantly reduced.
The following have a powerful influence on effec-
tive radio range ...
... the ambient conditions:
Range may be reduced by half in mountain bowls
or in the vicinity of public service transmitters, ra-
dar stations or similar apparatus. The ground cha-
racteristics, the type of terrain and the atmospheric
conditions also affect radio range.
... receiver technology and sophistication:
Technically sophisticated receivers have greater
range than simple, cheap, small receivers.
ROYAL
pro
10
... the radio installation in the model:
Radio range is also affected by the position and
attitude of the aerial, the distance to batteries, mo-
tors, servos, ignition systems, metal / carbon fibre
parts, etc.
Important: read the receiver instructions!
Please note the information regarding range con-
tained in the instructions supplied with your receiver.
The instructions will also include guideline figures for
the range check.
Important, if the model is powered:
Check the range initially with the motor or engine
switched off. During the second test, with the power
plant running (different throttle settings), the range
should not diminish significantly. If this is not the case,
you must seek out the cause of the interference (mo-
tor or engine, installed position of receiving system
and battery, vibration, …).
4. Liability / Compensation
Radio-controlled models are not playthings in the
usual sense of the term. The construction, the instal-
lation of the RC system and the method of operating
the models require technical expertise, care and re-
sponsible, safety-conscious behaviour. Errors and
oversights, not to mention deliberate negligence, can
result in serious damage or injury. You, as operator of
the model, are fundamentally responsible for the haz-
ards presented by your model. This liability is not ac-
cepted by the manufacturer. The same applies to ac-
cidents caused by uncontrollable interference or out-
side intervention. As operator of the model, you there-
fore are assumed to have an enhanced obligation of
care.
Since we as manufacturers have no means of ensur-
ing that you build, operate and maintain your models
and radio control equipment competently, all we can
do is expressly point out these hazards. We deny all
liability.
MULTIPLEX Modellsport GmbH & Co.KG accepts no
liability for loss, damages or costs which are incurred
due to the improper use and operation of the product,
or are connected in any way with such activity.
Whatever legal argument is employed, the liability of
MULTIPLEX is limited to the invoice value of those
MULTIPLEX products which were directly involved in
the event which caused the damage. This clause is
valid unless deemed invalid in a court of law. It no
longer applies if liability is accepted due to statutory
regulation on account of deliberate or gross neg-
ligence.
Moreover MULTIPLEX Modellsport GmbH & Co.KG
does not guarantee that the documents which accom-
pany the radio control components are complete or
correct in every respect.
Please read the relevant information sheets
included in the transmitter documentation!
5. Guarantee
We guarantee our products in accordance with the
currently valid legal requirements. If you wish to make
a claim under guarantee, please contact the dealer
from whom you purchased the equipment.
The guarantee does not cover malfunctions which are
caused by the following:
- improper usage, incorrect connections, reversed
polarity,
- maintenance carried out incorrectly, carried out
late, not carried out at all, or carried out by a non-
authorised body,
- the use of accessories other than genuine
MULTIPLEX items,
- modifications or repairs not carried out by
MULTIPLEX or an authorised MULTIPLEX Service
Centre,
- accidental or deliberate damage,
- defects due to normal wear and tear,
- operation of the equipment outside the specification,
or in conjunction with equipment made by other
manufacturers.
Please read the relevant information sheets
included in the transmitter documentation.
6. CE Conformity Declaration
ROYAL
pro
systems have been assessed in accor-
dance with European harmonised directives.
You are therefore the owner of a product whose de-
sign and construction satisfy the protective aims of the
European Community for the safe operation of equip-
ment.
A detailed Conformity Declaration is available on our
Internet site www.multiplex-rc.de from the DOWNLOADS
area under PRODUCT INFORMATION.
If necessary you can also request a copy of the con-
formity declaration from us.
MULTIPLEX Modellsport GmbH & Co.KG
Kundendienst / Customer Service
Westliche Gewerbestraße 1
D-75015 Bretten-Gölshausen
Germany
Manual
11
7. Specification
ROYAL
pro 7 9 12
Model memories 15 20 36
Channel count 7 9 12
Transmission mode switchable FM / PPM
or FM / M-PCM
Channel spacing 10 kHz
Servo pulse width at +/- 100% servo travel
PPM UNI 1.5 r 0.55 ms
MPX 1.6 r 0.55 ms
M-PCM UNI 1.5 r 0.55 ms
Power supply 7.2 V, 6 AA cells
Current drain < 50 mA excl. RF transmission
~ 250 mA incl. RF transmission
Charge current max. 1.4 A (fast charge)
210 mA (normal charge)
Permissible temperatures for
Operation 15 qC to + 55 qC
Storage 20 °C to + 60 °C
Battery charging 0 °C to + 40 °C
Weight incl. battery approx. 900 g
Dimensions
(L x W x H) approx. 220 x 270 x 60 mm
excl. carry handle and
stick tops, aerial retracted
7.1. Note regarding channels /
frequencies
! Use only the permitted channels / frequencies!
The ROYAL
pro
may only be used legally on frequen-
cies / transmission channels which are approved in
the country in which the transmitter is to be operated.
For detailed information on this subject please refer to
the CE information sheet (R&TTE directive) which is
supplied with all our transmitters, or on the Internet
under www.multiplex-rc.de under DOWNLOADS,
PRODUCT INFORMATION (document: “directive
R&TTE”). If in doubt, please contact the frequency
monitoring authority in the country where you wish to
use the equipment.
The four columns in the following table (Î 7.2.) list all
the channels / frequencies which can be set in the re-
levant frequency band of the ROYAL
pro
.
7.2. Frequency table
35 MHz 40 / 41 MHz
Channel
[MHz]
Channel
[MHz]
255 34.950 40 MHz
256 34.960 41 40.575
257 34.970 42 40.585
258 34.980 43 40.595
259 34.990 44 40.605
260 35.000 45 40.615
A
-band 46 40.625
61 35.010 47 40.635
62 35.020 48 40.645
63 35.030 49 40.655
64 35.040 50 40.665
65 35.050 51 40.675
66 35.060 52 40.685
67 35.070 53 40.695
68 35.080 40.705
69 35.090 54 40.715
70 35.100 55 40.725
71 35.110 56 40.735
72 35.120 40.745
73 35.130 40.755
74 35.140 57 40.765
75 35.150 58 40.775
76 35.160 59 40.785
77 35.170 40.795
78 35.180 40.805
79 35.190 81 40.815
80 35.200 82 40.825
83 40.835
281 35.210 40.845
282 35.220 40.855
283 35.230 84 40.865
284 35.240 85 40.875
285 35.250 86 40.885
286 35.260 40.895
287 35.270 40.905
288 35.280 87 40.915
289 35.290 88 40.925
290 35.300 89 40.935
291 35.310 40.945
292 35.320 40.955
293 35.330 90 40.965
B-band 91 40.975
182 35.820 92 40.985
183 35.830 40.995
184 35.840 41 MHz
185 35.850 400 41.000
186 35.860 401 41.010
187 35.870 402 41.020
188 35.880 403 41.030
189 35.890 404 41.040
190 35.900 405 41.050
191 35.910 406 41.060
407 41.070
408 41.080
409 41.090
410 41.100
411 41.110
412 41.120
413 41.130
414 41.140
415 41.150
416 41.160
417 41.170
418 41.180
419 41.190
420 41.200
Information correct as of 23.01.2008
ROYAL
pro
12
8. The Transmitter Battery
The ROYAL
pro
is powered by a high-quality re-
chargeable PERMABATT+ battery consisting of six
AA-size NiMH (Nickel-Metal-Hydride) cells.
Features of the PERMABATT+ transmitter battery:
x Capacity 2100 mAh
(approx. eight hours’ operation possible).
x Self-discharge rate around 25% per year
(no recharging required even when stored for long
periods).
x Fast-charge capable, max. 1.4 A
The pack must only be charged using a charger
with automatic cut-off: Delta-Peak cut-off at < 5 mV
per cell.
x Normal charge at 210 mA
(corresponding to 1/10 C, charge for sixteen hours).
x Integral over-current fuse, self-resetting
The battery is ready for use again approx. 1 s after
the excessive current is eliminated.
x Avoid deep-discharging the battery (< 5.4 V).
x If the transmitter or transmitter battery is to be
stored for a long period (several days), avoid tem-
peratures above 30°C (brief maximum 55°C).
Note:
Like many other technical components, rechargeable
batteries are the subject of constant development. For
this reason we reserve the right to alter the specifi-
cation of the battery pack installed as standard, in or-
der to keep abreast of technical developments.
8.1. Safety Notes
! The transmitter battery is responsible for the power
supply to the transmitter, and plays an important
role in operational security. For this reason it is es-
sential to heed our recommendations regarding
charging and storing the rechargeable battery.
! The transmitter is fitted with a self-resetting fuse
which protects the battery and the transmitter from
short-circuit, reversed polarity and excessive cur-
rents. The transmitter electronics feature no addi-
tional fuse!
For this reason it is absolutely essential to use
genuine MULTIPLEX transmitter batteries in this
transmitter!
! Additional safety notes:
x Batteries are not playthings, and must always be
stored well out of the reach of children.
x Check that the battery is in perfect condition before
every flying session. Damaged or defective bat-
teries must not be re-used. Dispose of them in the
authorised manner / recycling centre (Î 8.8.).
x Do not heat, incinerate, open or short-circuit re-
chargeable batteries, do not charge or discharge
them at excessive currents, do not overcharge
them, and do not charge with reversed polarity.
x Place the transmitter or battery on a heat-resistant,
non-inflammable and non-conductive surface for
charging, and do not leave it on charge unsuper-
vised.
x Do not modify the battery pack in any way. Never
solder or weld directly to the cells.
x Mis-handling the battery incurs a risk of combus-
tion, explosion, corrosion and burning.
Suitable extinguishing agents: water, CO
2
, sand.
x Escaped electrolyte is corrosive!
Do not allow electrolyte to contact your skin or eyes.
In an emergency rinse the affected area with copi-
ous quantities of water, and call for medical assis-
tance immediately.
8.2. Charging the transmitter battery
!
Never connect the transmitter to a battery
charger without a battery in the transmitter!
High voltages may be present at the charge out-
puts of battery chargers if no battery is connected.
These voltages can easily damage the transmitter.
!
Timer-controlled fast-charging, automatic cur-
rent setting systems and REFLEX charging
must not be used with this battery!
!
Fast-charge at max. 1.4 A!
This also applies if you remove the battery
from the transmitter for charging.
!
Important when fast-charging:
The battery charger must be suitable for NiMH
cells!
Delta-Peak cut-off sensitivity < 5 mV / cell
!
Charging using mains or 12 V chargers:
It is safe to leave the battery in the transmitter for
recharging. The charger should be connected
using the multi-function socket on the underside
of the transmitter (Î 9.2.). Use genuine MULTIPLEX
charge leads (e.g. transmitter charge lead with
banana plugs # 8 6020). Please refer to the cur-
rent MULTIPLEX main catalogue for information
concerning other charge leads and battery char-
gers.
8.3. The correct method of charging
a. Switch the transmitter OFF.
b. Select a charger suitable for NiMH batteries,
switch it on and connect the charge lead to it.
c. Check correct polarity:
red plug = positive terminal (+)
blue / black plug = negative terminal (-)
Connecting the transmitter battery with re-
versed polarity may wreck the battery
(overheating, escape of corrosive electrolyte, cell
burst)!
d. Connect the charge lead to the transmitter
(back panel, CHARGE (Î 9.2.)).
e. Select the charge current (max. 1.4 A).
!
If you are using an automatic fast-charger,
select the current manually!
Manual
13
f. If the battery becomes hot whilst on charge, to the
point where you can no longer touch the pack, in-
terrupt the charge process immediately.
g. When the charge process is complete, first discon-
nect the transmitter / battery from the charger, and
then the charger from the power source.
h. When the charge process is complete, check the
charge quantity calculated by the battery manage-
ment circuit, and correct it if necessary (Î 8.4.3. a.).
8.4. ROYAL
pro
battery management
The term “battery management” means that the trans-
mitter measures the current when the unit is in use
and
when the battery is on charge. From this data the
software calculates the actual state of charge of the
battery, and displays it on-screen in Status display 4
(Î Fig. 8.4.1.) and in the main menu ¡Setup under
Transmitter (Î Fig. 8.4.2.).
When the RF module is operating (LED flashes red)
the expected residual operating time is calculated
and displayed in Status display 4. This indicates how
long the transmitter should be able to operate if the
current drain remains the same:
ROYALpro12 2.53 DE/EN
CH: 0
0
63 35.030MHz
Modulation FM/PPM 9
Batt. voltage 8.20V
Battery charge 1998mAh
Remaining time 7.7h
Operating time 12.4h
Fig. 8.4.1.: Status display 4
8.4.1. Self-discharge
When the transmitter is stored, the system also takes
into account the battery’s rate of self-discharge, and
corrects the available battery charge quantity accord-
ingly.
The ROYAL
pro
uses transmitter batteries of the type
PERMABATT+. The new manufacturing process used
for these batteries has reduced the rate of self-
discharge to around 0.07% per day (approx. 25% self-
discharge annually). The self-discharge rate of con-
ventional NiMH batteries is around 1.5% per day.
For this reason the menu ¡Setup, Transmitter in-
cludes the menu point SlfDsCharge (self-discharge):
¡Transmitter
©
Battery
Alarm 7.10V
Capacity 2100mAh
Charge 1900mAh
SlfDsCharge low
Display
ª Contrast 0
Fig. 8.4.1.1.: Menu: Setup, Transmitter
In this menu point it is possible to switch the self-dis-
charge rate between “low” (approx. 25% per year)
and “normal” (approx. 1.5 % per day). The factory de-
fault setting is “low”.
!
Battery management only provides supple-
mentary information!
Battery charge and residual time represent additional
information relating to the condition of the transmitter
battery, and are intended to provide additional security
when handling the transmitter. However, major dis-
crepancies may occur due to production tolerances,
battery ageing and the effects of battery maintenance.
In any case the system only works properly if the ca-
pacity and battery charge quantity (Î 8.4.3.a.) are set
correctly when the battery is initially charged.
8.4.2. Unchanged features
Voltage display:
Virtually all modern transmitters display the actual bat-
tery voltage as a numerical value and / or in graphic
form (bar graph).
Battery alarm:
If the battery voltage falls below a certain minimum
value, the transmitter emits an audible alarm. On
many transmitters the alarm threshold is variable.
As you would expect, the ROYAL
pro
also includes
these two functions (Setting the alarm threshold
(Î 14.1.3.)).
8.4.3. This is important
To ensure that the battery management function dis-
plays values which are as close to “the truth” as pos-
sible, it is essential to observe the following points:
a. Correcting the battery capacity
The battery management function assumes that
the transmitter is fitted with a battery of 2100 mAh
capacity. When the transmitter battery has been
conditioned (more than five charge / discharge cy-
cles) you can correct any discrepancy from the
nominal capacity as follows:
Menu: LSetup, Transmitter,
Parameter: Battery Capacity.
At this point you can set the value determined by
the battery charger (in increments of 50 mAh).
!
When the battery voltage falls below 6.5 V,
the available charge quantity is set to 0 mAh.
b. Correcting the available battery charge quantity
If you fit a new transmitter battery, or charge it di-
rectly (i.e. not via the socket on the back panel),
then the available battery charge quantity must be
corrected manually:
Menu: LSetup, Transmitter,
Parameter: Battery charge.
!
If the battery voltage is above 8.6 V when
the transmitter is switched on, the battery
charge quantity is set to the value which is set
for battery capacity in the menu ¡Setup,
Transmitter.
!
If the battery voltage falls below 6.5 V, the
available charge quantity is set to 0 mAh.
ROYAL
pro
14
c. Charge the battery via the charge socket!
The battery management system can only calcu-
late the available charge quantity if you recharge
the battery via the charge socket.
d. Normal charging at constant current (210 mA)
If you leave the battery connected to the charger
for longer than the period calculated according to
the formula in Section 8.5.1, the battery manage-
ment system still displays the charge quantity
which you have set as the capacity in the menu
¡Setup, Transmitter.
8.5. Terms used in battery charging
Full capacity and potential performance ...
… are achieved by NiMH batteries only after several
charge / discharge cycles (~5 cycles). The initial charge /
discharge cycles should be carried out at 0.1 C (210
mA). Don’t fast-charge the battery until you have first
conditioned the pack in this way.
Charging at 1 C ...
... feeds 100% of the battery’s nominal capacity into
the pack in one hour in the form of charged-in energy.
For a battery of 2000 mAh capacity a current of
2000 mA is required to achieve this. If this current is
used for charging, we speak of a 1 C charge. This cur-
rent value is found by simply taking the nominal ca-
pacity in mAh (or Ah), and omitting the “h” (hours).
8.5.1. Normal charging …
... means that the battery is charged at a current
within the range 0.05 C and 0.2 C. For a 2000 mAh
pack, for example, this means a charge rate of 100
mA to 400 mA.
To ensure that a rechargeable battery really is fully
charged, it is necessary to feed more than 100% of its
nominal capacity into the pack. The amount of the ad-
ditional charge is defined by the charge factor.
The charge time for a flat battery is calculated as fol-
lows:
Capacity [mAh]
Charge time [h] = -------------------------------
*
charge factor
Charge current [mA]
!
Note the charge factor for normal charging!
For PERMABATT+ type batteries of 2100 mAh the
charge factor is 1.6. Using a charge current of 210 mA
(1/10 C) a flat battery must therefore be charged for
sixteen hours if it is to be charged fully.
8.5.2. Fast charging …
... means that the battery is charged at a current in the
range 0.5 C to 1 C.
!
Observe the maximum charge current!
For PERMABATT+ type batteries of 2100 mAh the
maximum approved fast-charge current is 1.4 A.
In this case the charge time is determined by the fast-
charger’s automatic cut-off circuit.
8.5.3. Trickle charging …
... means that the battery is charged at a current within
the range 0.03 C to 0.05 C.
!
Observe the maximum trickle charge current!
For PERMABATT+ type batteries of 2100 mAh ca-
pacity we recommend a trickle charge current of 20
mA to 100 mA. At a trickle charge rate of max. 105
mA the battery can safely be left connected to the
charger for up to a year.
Many automatic battery chargers switch to a trickle
charge current when the main charge process is ter-
minated. If this is the case, we recommend that you
switch off the trickle charge no later than 24 hours af-
ter the charge process is complete.
8.6. Replacing the transmitter battery
If you replace the transmitter battery by a pack other
than a genuine MULTIPLEX battery, please note the
following:
!
Maximum current via the charge socket: 2 A!
!
Be sure to follow the charging instructions
provided by the battery manufacturer!
!
Set the self-discharge rate to suit the battery
type you are using! (Î 8.4., Fig. 8.4.2.).
8.7. Transmitter battery care and storage
NiMH batteries should always be stored fully charged.
This avoids the danger of deep-discharging.
Store NiMH batteries at temperatures in the range 0°C
to 30°C, in dry conditions, away from direct sunshine.
Top up (recharge) unused NiMH batteries every six to
twelve months. This compensates for the self-
discharge effect, and avoids the danger of the cells
becoming deep-discharged.
Batteries which have been stored for a long period
should be conditioned (multiple charge / discharge cy-
cles). Note that the usable capacity of such batteries
may diminish after a long period of storage.
8.8. Recycling
Do not dispose of exhausted rechargeable batteries in
the ordinary domestic waste. Take your old packs to a
suitable recycling centre. Make sure the batteries are
completely discharged beforehand, and insulate the
terminals to avoid the danger of short-circuit.
Manual
15
9. The Transmitter
9.1. Front face of the transmitter
Fig. 9.1.1.: Front face of transmitter
(Switches K and P retro-fitted; not included as standard.)
The front face of the transmitter features the following
elements:
c Two extremely accurate, ballraced stick units for
controlling the four primary axes. Stick ratchet for
throttle / spoiler can be activated right or left (Î
9.4.5.). Both stick units can be swivelled to suit the pi-
lot’s ergonomic preferences (Î 9.4.7.). The stick tops
rotate and are infinitely variable in length; various
types of stick top are available.
d Two permanently installed proportional controls
(sliders “E” and “F”) with centre detent; available for
use with freely assignable channel functions and / or
switched functions.
e Two cruciform trim groups below the stick units
for digital trimming of the primary control axes. They
consist of pairs of buttons for left / right and up / down.
f Audible sounder (piezo beeper).
g When the transmitter is switched on, the RF sta-
tus indicator / LED (red LED) indicates whether an
RF (Radio Frequency) signal is being transmitted:
LED glows constantly
o no RF transmission
LED flashes every two seconds
o RF being transmitted
The LED is controlled by the current drain of the RF
module. If the RF module is not drawing the corres-
ponding current, or is not installed, the constantly
glowing LED warns you that an RF signal is not being
transmitted.
h Keypad consisting of eleven buttons in two rows.
The six buttons in the top row provide fast, direct ac-
cess to the six main menus (direct menu access but-
tons). The five buttons in the second row are used for
programming the transmitter.
With the exception of the “ENTER” button, all the but-
tons have a dual function for text input. Text is entered
in a similar way to mobile telephones (Î 11.1.1.c.).
i OFF / ON switch (“O” / “1”).
j The screen is a modern, UV-stable, non-reflective
graphic LCD unit (132 x 64 dots) featuring variable
contrast (Î 14.1.4.). The screen can be hinged
through around 40° to optimise the viewing angle.
k Two 3-D digi-adjusters are used for program-
ming and set-up tasks. They are fitted as standard,
and are permanently installed. For programming, both
adjusters work in parallel with the “ENTER” button and
the “” (UP) / “” (DOWN) buttons. When using the
transmitter it is possible to allocate many different set-
tings / parameters to the 3-D digi-adjusters, enabling
the pilot to adjust the settings quickly and easily while
the model is in the air (Î 20.1.).
l Neckstrap lug for attaching a support strap (e.g.
# 8 5161 or # 8 5646).
All the remaining control elements ...
… (switches / buttons “G” to “O”, apart from installa-
tion wells “K” and “P” (Î 20.6.6.)), are installed as
standard in easily accessible locations. They cannot
be altered or interchanged.
The switch and button designations are neutral (“G”,
“H”, “I”, ... “O”, “P”) and are only intended for identifi-
cation purposes, as they can be assigned to any
channel and / or switched function (transmitter control
or switch) (Î 14.3.).
1
9
8
1
7
6
2
10
9
3
4
5
ROYAL
pro
16
9.2. Rear face of the transmitter
Fig. 9.2.1.: Rear face of the transmitter
c Two sliding latches (marked “OPEN”) provide a
fast, easy method of opening and closing the transmit-
ter, e.g. for changing the RF module (Î 9.4.3).
d The robust carry handle provides a safe method
of carrying the transmitter, and also protects the rear
face when you set the transmitter down.
e As is usual with MULTIPLEX, the ROYAL
pro
is
also fitted with a MULTIPLEX multi-function socket
installed as standard (marked “CHARGE”). It is used
as:
x charge socket for the transmitter (Î 8.2.)
x socket for Trainer operations
(Î 14.4.1. and 14.4.2.)
x PC interface for backing-up model data
(Î 20.3.)
x PC interface for updating the transmitter
(Î 20.3.)
x PC interface for flight simulators
(Î 20.4.)
x interface for a ‘closed-loop’ receiver connection
(without RF transmission) for programming and ad-
justment work using a Diagnosis lead (Î 20.2.).
f The TORX
£
screwdriver (size T6), which resides
in clips in the transmitter’s back panel, is used for
various tasks such as adjusting the stick ratchet, fric-
tion and centring spring force, swivelling the stick
units, and for installing supplementary switches in the
installation wells “K” and “P”.
Fig. 9.2.2.: TORX screwdriver in the transmitter back panel
9.3. Interior of the transmitter
Fig. 9.3.1.: The interior of the transmitter
c The transmitter battery fitted as standard con-
sists of six environmentally friendly, high-capacity AA-
size NiMH (Nickel-Metal-Hydride) cells. For safety
reasons the individual cells are permanently inter-
connected and protected by a heat-shrink sleeve.
! Use genuine replacement batteries only!
Always heed the charging instructions!
(Î 8.2. and 8.3.)
The transmitter battery is fitted with a thermal fuse
which protects the battery - and above all the trans-
mitter - from short-circuit, reversed polarity and ex-
cessive currents. The transmitter does not feature
a separate fuse. For this reason it is essential to
use genuine MULTIPLEX transmitter batteries de-
signed for this transmitter.
d RF module (Radio Frequency module). The RF
module is simply plugged into the main circuit board,
and can easily be changed if you wish, for example, to
switch to a different frequency band (Î 9.4.3.). The
ROYAL
pro
is fitted with the HFM-S M-PCM/PPM RF
module:
HFM-S M-PCM/PPM, 35 MHz A- and B-band
# 4 5600
HFM-S M-PCM/PPM, 40 / 41 MHz # 4 5601
Î Modern Synthesizer RF module with software-
selected channel / transmitter frequency.
!
Only RF modules of this type may be fitted to
the ROYAL
pro
!
!
Scanner with power-on guard can be fitted
(Î 20.6.2.).
3
2
3
1
4
2
1
Manual
17
9.4. Mechanical details
9.4.1. Opening / closing the transmitter case
!Switch the transmitter OFF before opening the
case (short-circuit hazard)!
Opening the transmitter case:
Fig. 9.4.1.1. Fig. 9.4.1.2.
a. Hold the transmitter in both hands, and push the
rear-mounted sliding latches down with both
thumbs (towards “OPEN”) (Î Fig. 9.4.1.1.).
b. Carefully remove the rear case panel
(Î Fig. 9.4.1.2.).
Closing the transmitter case:
Fig. 9.4.1.3. Fig. 9.4.1.4.
c. Carefully stand the case at an angle on its rear edge,
and engage the two retaining lugs on the back panel
in their recesses
(arrows in Î Fig. 9.4.1.3.).
d. Carefully close the back panel (Î Fig. 9.4.1.4.).
! Ensure that no wires are trapped, and that the
transmitter aerial has not slipped out of its guide
tube. It should be possible to fit the case back
easily, without using force.
e. Push the sliding latches up as far as they will go
(opposite direction to “OPEN”).
9.4.2. Adjusting / replacing the transmitter aerial
The transmitter aerial is permanently installed in the
case. For transport it can be completely collapsed and
recessed into the transmitter. For adjustment and pro-
gramming work the aerial can be left in this position.
The RF section will not be damaged if you do this.
! Always extend the aerial to full length when you
are controlling a model. This will ensure that the
system works reliably, with maximum radiated
power and effective range.
Fig. 9.4.2.1. Fig. 9.4.2.2.
The aerial can also be moved and locked in a second
position (angled up and left) for controlling a model:
a. Pull the aerial outward until you feel a noticeable
resistance (Î Fig. 9.4.2.1.).
b. Pull the aerial past the resistance (approx. 3 - 5
mm further), then swivel the aerial upward and to
the left (Î Fig. 9.4.2.2.). At this point there is no
resistance to overcome.
c. Tilt the aerial as far as it will go
the aerial locks itself in the new position.
To swivel the aerial back to the original location you
must first unlock it as described under a.
! At regular intervals check the aerial for good con-
tact. Contact problems relating to telescopic aerials
are a frequent cause of poor transmitted power
and therefore reduced range, and have an adverse
effect on reliable operation. Aerials with intermit-
tent contact, bent aerials or aerials which extend
and retract too easily (wear) should be replaced.
Fig. 9.4.2.3.
If the aerial is damaged, it can easily be replaced:
simply remove the transmitter back panel and slide it
down and out of the aerial guide tube (Î Fig. 9.4.2.3.).
Replacement ROYAL
pro
aerial: # 89 3001 or # 89 3006.
9.4.3. Removing / installing the RF module
The HFM-S M-PCM/PPM RF module is not protected
by a case. For this reason:
x Do not touch the main circuit board or components.
x Do subject the main circuit board to mechanical stress.
x Do not place the RF module itself under mechanical
stress.
!
Do not touch components on the RF module
(Î 3.1. ESD notes).
Do not change any settings.
If the setting of any component on the RF module
is changed accidentally, or if any parts are da-
maged, have the module checked / repaired and
re-adjusted by a Service Centre or the main
MULTIPLEX Customer Service.
OPEN
CLOSE
ROYAL
pro
18
Removing the RF module:
a. Switch the transmitter OFF!
b. Open the transmitter (Î 9.4.1.).
c. Lay the transmitter down on a soft surface, open
face towards you. Take care not to damage the
sticks and switches!
d. Hold the RF module by all four corners using your
thumbs and index fingers, then carefully and
evenly pull it straight up (see picture below).
Installing the RF module:
Hold the RF module as just described, and place it on
the contact pins. Check carefully that all the pins are
engaged in the right position, then carefully and even-
ly press it into place.
Fig. 9.4.3.1.: Removing and installing the RF module
9.4.4. Replacing the transmitter battery
a. Switch the transmitter OFF!
b. Locate the snap-catches of the two plastic battery
retainers, pull both of them back in the direction of
the battery, then fold them up (Î Fig. 9.4.4.1.).
c. Remove the battery and withdraw the battery con-
nector and lead from the socket on the main circuit
board (Î Fig. 9.4.4.2.).
Fig. 9.4.4.1. Fig. 9.4.4.2.
Opening / closing the retainers Connecting the battery
When installing the battery ensure that the connecting
lead is neatly deployed, so that it cannot become trapped
when you close the transmitter back.
Note:
No model data is lost when you swap batteries.
9.4.5. Disabling the stick centring spring, acti-
vating the ratchet / friction system
ROYAL
pro
transmitters are supplied as standard with
self-centring sticks. The springs for use with a ratchet
or friction system are already fitted to both stick units,
and can be activated quickly and easily as follows:
Switch the transmitter OFF and open the case.
a. Locate the TORX screwdriver on the inside of the
transmitter back panel, and use it to tighten (turn
clockwise) the TORX screw on the appropriate
(please check!) neutralising lever (1) to the point
where the stick centring action is completely dis-
abled. Don’t screw it in too far! On no account
remove the neutralising lever and centring
spring!
b. The screws (2) hold the springs, while the screws
(3) adjust the hardness of the ratchet / friction ac-
tion: the further you tighten the screw, the harder
the ratchet or friction.
If you wish, you can set a superimposed ratchet / fric-
tion action by activating both springs on one stick.
This is simply a matter of personal preference.
Fig. 9.4.5.1.: Adjuster screws on the stick unit
9.4.6. Adjusting the “hardness” of the sticks
This term applies to the centring force of the neutral-
ising spring on any one stick axis.
The ROYAL
pro
allows you to adjust the “hardness”
for each of the four stick axes separately. The picture
above shows how adjustments are made. The stick
axes become “harder” when you tighten the screws (4)
(turn them clockwise).
9.4.7. Swivelling the stick units
A unique feature of the ROYAL
pro
is that its stick
units can be swivelled to improve the ergonomics of
the transmitter. This is particularly advantageous if
you operate the transmitter hand-held, and use your
thumbs to control short sticks. In this case the “natural
working axis” is not exactly horizontal and vertical
relative to the transmitter, but at a more or less pro-
nounced angle. Both stick units of the ROYAL
pro
can
be swivelled to any angle up to about 15° from the
nominal position.
(4) "Hardness
"
centring force
right / left
(4) "Hardness
"
centring force
forward / back
(1) Disable
neutralisin
action
(3) Strength of friction / ratchet
(2) Spring for
friction or ratchet
Manual
19
Fig. 9.4.7.1.
a. Using the T6 TORX screwdriver (located in clips in
the transmitter back cover) (Î Fig. 9.4.7.2.),
loosen the three TORX screws which retain the
appropriate stick unit until the unit can be swivelled.
b. Rotate the stick unit to the angle which seems
most natural to you (Î Fig. 9.4.7.3.), then tighten
the TORX screws again. Don’t over-tighten them,
or you might strip the threads in the plastic.
Fig. 9.4.7.2. Fig. 9.4.7.3.
9.4.8. Adjusting / replacing the stick tops
The ROYAL
pro
is supplied as standard with three
pairs of stick tops of different lengths. They are easily
changed, rotated and adjusted in length:
a. Place the transmitter on a flat surface.
b. Hold the stick top in one hand, and loosen the
locking nut by turning it clockwise with your other
hand (Î Fig. 9.4.8.1.).
The stick shaft is smooth, so the stick top can now be
rotated or adjusted in length. If you wish to change the
stick tops, unscrew the locking nuts and use them to
secure the alternative items (Î Fig. 9.4.8.2.).
Before fitting the stick tops please ensure that the
shafts are clean and devoid of grease or oil. If you ne-
glect this, the stick tops may not stay in position.
Fig. 9.4.8.1. Fig. 9.4.8.2.
9.5. Plastic stick top with three but-
tons: installation and functions
If your model features important supplementary func-
tions, the long stick top with push-button / switch
(# 7 5303, supplied with the transmitter) may be use-
ful, as it provides a fast, simple and reliable method of
operating such functions without having to let go of
the stick.
Fig. 9.5.1. Fig. 9.5.2.
The top button KTa has a momentary function.
The two side-mounted buttons to-
gether form the switch KSw.
This stick top is connected to the
transmitter electronics by means
of two wires. The button and the
switched function can be assigned
to transmitter controls and
switches using the same pro-
cedure as for the other buttons (H
and M) and switches.
Fig. 9.5.3.
Fitting this stick top is quick and simple, and requires
no soldering:
a. Switch the transmitter OFF and remove the stick
top.
b. Locate the two connecting wires attached to the
stick top with the push-buttons, slip them through
the locking nut and the stick shaft (Î Fig. 9.5.4.),
then install the stick top exactly as described in
Chapter 9.4.8.
Tip:
You will find it easier to thread the wires through
the stick shaft if you curve the cable ends slightly
and hold the stick in one corner position.
c. Clip the wires from the stick unit in the holders de-
signed for them. Check that the cables have plenty
of ‘elbow room’ when you move the stick, are
never under tension, i.e. they cannot become
trapped at any position of the associated stick.
d. Locate the appropriate screw clamp terminal block
on the main circuit board, and run the bare wire
ends to the clamps (Î Fig. 9.5.5; small slot-head
screwdriver required) from the transmitter battery
side; you will need to remove the battery before
doing this. The two wires can be connected to ter-
minals C and D either way round.
KSw '
KSw #
1
2
3
ROYAL
pro
20
Fig. 9.5.4. Fig. 9.5.5.
!
Note: calibrating the stick buttons
When a stick top with push-buttons is first connected
to the transmitter, the software carries out an auto-
matic calibration process. If you need to replace the
stick top for any reason, a re-calibration must be car-
ried out; this will only occur if you reset the original
calibration using the PC program “ROYALpro-
DataManager” (Î 20.3.). For more information on this
procedure please refer to the instructions supplied
with the “DataManager”.
9.6. Digital trims
9.6.1. General information
The term “trimming” refers to the following procedure:
For example, you want your model aircraft to fly
straight and level when you leave the sticks exactly at
centre. If this is not the case, and the model always
tends to turn in one direction, you can adjust the neu-
tral point of the corresponding control function (in our
example Rudder) to “trim” the model accurately.
The ROYAL
pro
features digital trims on all four axes
of the primary sticks.
The ROYAL
pro
exploits the “Centre Trim” principle,
i.e. trim corrections only affect the area around the
centre point of the transmitter control, without affecting
the end-points of the travel. Compared with “standard
trims” this offers the advantage that full transmitter
control travel (and thus servo travel) is always avail-
able, because no reserve has to be provided for trim-
ming:
Dead zone
not
accessible
Centre Trim principle
Trim
Untrimmed
Standard
trim
Top
end-point
Bottom
end-point
Stick travel
S
e
r
v
o
t
r
a
v
e
l
Standard trims:
If you move a stick with standard trims to the right, the
servo reaches its upper end-point before the stick
reaches its own end-point, as shown in the diagram
above. This means: a dead-zone at the stick.
When the stick is moved to the left, the servo does not
reach full travel in the “down” direction. This means:
available servo travel which cannot be exploited.
Centre trims:
The servo runs to both end-points regardless of the
associated trim setting.
Tip:
Since Centre Trims alter the effect curve of the trans-
mitter control, it is important to limit trim corrections to
small values. If a large correction is required, it is al-
ways best to adjust the mechanical linkage.
9.6.2. Advantages of digital trims
Digital trims offer two significant advantages:
1. The physical position of a conventional trim (with
trim slider) corresponds to the actual trim value,
but digital trim buttons do not. Instead the digital
trim position is displayed on the screen, and the
trim values are stored in the model memory. If you
switch model memories, the correct trims are im-
mediately available, i.e. there is no need to move
the trim sliders to the correct position to suit the
model.
2. If the ROYAL
pro
is used with a model for which
you have set up multiple flight phases, each flight
phase has its own trim memory, i.e. it is an easy
matter to trim each flight phase accurately, and
independently of the trims in the other phases.
9.6.3. The cruciform digital trims
In the case of the ROYAL
pro
, trimming is carried out
using the buttons arranged in a cross-shape below
and to one side of each primary stick unit. They are
located in an ergonomically efficient position, and are
easily reached when you are using the transmitter,
whether hand-held or in a tray.
The effect of each button-press is to shift the trim of
the associated control axis in the corresponding direc-
tion. If you hold the trim button pressed in for longer
than about 0.5 sec., the trim value changes con-
tinuously until you release the button once more
(AUTO-REPEAT function).
Each trim increment (step) is accompanied by an au-
dible beep. When the trim reaches Centre or either
end-point of the trim range, the transmitter emits dif-
ferent beeps to inform you of the position. The trim
beeps can be switched OFF and ON (Î 14.1.1.).
!
The trim of the fourth stick axis (‡) always
acts as throttle idle trim!
This also applies to gliders (powered gliders) if
this stick controls Spoiler, or model helicopters
if this stick controls Collect. (collective pitch).
9.6.4. On-screen trim display
The trim positions are displayed in graphic form at
both sides and the bottom of the screen in Status dis-
plays 1 - 3:
C D
Manual
21
Starting from the trim centre position, the maximum
trim range is twenty increments in both directions. The
trim increment (step, or adjustment rate) can be set to
any of four magnitudes (0.5%, 1.5%, 2.5%, 3.5%) (Î
15.4.2.).
! Note regarding increment size and trim range:
the number of steps remains the same even if
you change the size of the trim increment,
with the result that both the trim range and
the absolute trim value also change! This
means: if you alter the trim increment size,
you must remember to re-trim the model.
The current trim value is displayed in graphic form on
the screen, but can also be read off as a numeric
value for each transmitter control (Parameter Trim Î
15.4.1.).
The type of graphic display can be selected in the
Status screen (Parameter Trim graph (Trim graphic)
Î 14.1.4.).
Tip!
Resetting the trim to Centre:
Simultaneously pressing both trim buttons for any
stick axis resets the trim for the currently active flight
phase to Centre. This also applies to throttle trim.
10. Switching on, using the
transmitter
!
The ROYAL
pro
is supplied with the transmitter
battery partially charged. The pack must be fully
charged before you use the transmitter. Please refer
to the charging notes (Î 8.).
10.1. Switching on for the first time
The very first time you switch the ROYAL
pro
trans-
mitter on is a special case. When switched on, the
transmitter displays the following menu:
ROYALpro12 2.53 DE/EN
Select language:
Sprache wählen:
skip/später
English
Deutsch ENTER 
In this menu you select the language which the trans-
mitter will use for the menus and
the names of the
pre-defined mixers and assignment lists. We recom-
mend that you select the appropriate language when
you first switch the transmitter on:
Select the appropriate language using the Ÿ and ź
buttons, then press ENTER to confirm your choice.
If you select English:
a. English will be used as the menu language.
b. The pre-defined mixers are defined using English
terminology:
ELEVATR+, AILERON+, …
The mixer inputs are also described in English:
Aileron, Elevator, Rudder, …
If you change the selected language to German
(Deutsch) in the menu Setup, User, then the
names of the pre-defined mixers will continue to
appear in English, but the German terms will be
used for the mixer inputs:
Quer, Höhe, Seite, …
It is possible to change the names of all the four-
teen free mixers to anything you like (Name pa-
rameter). This is accomplished in the menu Setup,
Mixer def..
If you select Deutsch (German):
a. German will be used as the menu language.
b. The pre-defined mixers are defined using the
German terminology:
HÖHE+, QUER+, …
The mixer inputs are also described in German:
Quer, Höhe, Seite, …
If you select skip/später (not recommended):
a. English will be used as the language.
b. Next time you switch on, the same menu will ap-
pear, and you can repeat the language selection.
Only these
buttons are
active!
ROYAL
pro
22
10.2. Switching on “normally”
10.2.1. RF module excl. Scanner installed
If the transmitter is fitted with an RF module without
the optional Scanner, one of three possible sequen-
ces will occur when you switch on; they are described
below:
Pre-condition: The RF Check parameter is set to ON
in the menu Setup, Transmitter.
a.) RF module switched on for
the first time: no RF channel
has been set.
Switch on with the L button
pressed in, and select an RF
channel (Î b.).
b.) Use the 3-D digi-adjuster to
select an RF channel, then
switch the transmitter
OFF - ON or
press any menu button or
ENTER to activate operation
without RF transmission.
c.) Activate RF transmission by
pressing any menu button or
ENTER.
! If Check RF is OFF:
If you have set the RF check to OFF in the menu
Setup, Transmitter (not recommended), the se-
lected channel confirmation described under b.) does
not occur before an RF signal is broadcast.
10.2.2. RF module installed, Scanner installed
If your transmitter is fitted with an RF module with
the
optional Scanner, the following two possibilities arise.
Pre-condition: the parameter Check RF is set to ON
in the menu Setup, Transmitter.
a.) The selected channel was
already in use when the trans-
mitter was switched on.
An RF signal is not broadcast.
Start the Scanner by pressing
any menu button or ENTER.
b.) The RF channel is already
set, and is free for use.
Activate RF transmission by
pressing any menu button or
ENTER.
! If Check RF is OFF:
If you have set the RF check to OFF in the menu
Setup, Transmitter (not recommended), the se-
lected channel confirmation described under b.) does
not occur before an RF signal is broadcast.
10.3. Switching on when no RF module
is installed
If the transmitter is switched on with no RF module
fitted, these two screen displays appear in turn:
Fig. 10.3.1.: Transmitter type, Fig. 10.3.2: No RF modul
Firmware version, languages installed
The message No RF remains on the screen for about
one second.
After this the program continues with the throttle
check (Î 10.4.), or moves on directly to the last used
Status display (Î 10.6.).
10.4. Switching the transmitter on
with throttle-check active
Throttle-check is a safety function. If you are about to
fly a powered model, the throttle check (throttle lock)
prevents an electric motor bursting into life unexpec-
tedly if you switch the system on when the throttle
channel is not at idle
.
You will find the parameter Check Thr. in the menu:
Setup, Transmitter:
¡Transmitter
¨Exit
Sound All
Safety
Check Thr. ON_
Check RF ON
The factory default setting is ON. The conditions for
throttle-check are different for fixed-wing model aircraft
and helicopters; for this reason they are described
separately in the next two sections.
10.4.1.
Throttle-check for fixed-wing models
This warning appears if:
x Throttle-Check (Check Thr.) is set to ON (see above)
and
x the throttle control is not
in the idle position (or at
the motor OFF position)
and
x the Throttle CUT switch has not
been operated.
Indicator for
throttle control
(throttle stick
in this case)
ROYALpro12 2.53 DE/EN
V268
ROYALpro12
MULTIPLEX
Manual
23
As long as the on-screen warning is visible, …
x the servo assigned to throttle (or the speed control-
ler) remains in the Idle position (or motor OFF),
and
x all other control functions can still be operated nor-
mally.
The throttle lock is terminated when …
x the throttle control is moved to the Idle position (or
motor OFF),
or
x the Throttle CUT control is operated (default button H)
or
x you press the REV/CLR button.
! Caution! The motor might start to run!
If you override the throttle lock using the REV/CLR
button or Throttle CUT, the throttle channel will jump
to the value defined by the assigned throttle control.
10.4.2. Throttle-check for model helicopters
Helicopter throttle is affected by the following trans-
mitter controls:
a. Throttle CUT switch (default: button H).
b. Direct Throttle switch
(DTC = Direct Throttle Control, default: switch N).
c. Collective pitch stick via the throttle curve.
d. Throttle limiter (default: slider F).
This warning appears on-screen if:
x Throttle-Check (Check Thr.) is set to ON (Î 10.4.)
and
x the collective pitch stick is not
at the Idle position
(collective pitch minimum)
and
x the Throttle CUT switch is not active.
As long as the note is visible on the screen, …
x the servo assigned to throttle (or the speed control-
ler) remains in the Idle position (or motor OFF)
and
x all other control functions can still be operated
normally.
The throttle lock is terminated when …
x the collective pitch stick is moved to the Collective
Pitch Minimum position (provided that: point P1
on the throttle curve is lower than or equal to the
set value for Throttle Minimum Min.)
or
x EMERGENCY throttle OFF is operated (default:
button H)
or
x the throttle limiter is moved to the Minimum position
or
x you press the REV/CLR button.
! Caution! The motor might start to run!
If you override the throttle lock using the REV/CLR
button or Throttle CUT, the throttle will jump to the
value defined by the assigned throttle control.
10.5. Switching on to change the
transmitter frequency, or to use
the Scanner
Two buttons have special functions which only apply
when you switch the transmitter on:
a. Button
L
(Setup)
If you hold this button pressed in
when you switch the transmitter on,
the menu for selecting the transmis-
sion channel (transmitter frequency)
appears as soon as you release the
button:
You can now select the channel on which you wish to
operate using the 3-D digi-adjuster or the Ÿź buttons.
! For safety reasons the channel selection option
only appears if the transmitter is first switched OFF,
and then switched ON again.
b. Button
F
(allocate 3-D digi-adjuster / scan)
If you hold this button pressed in
when you switch the transmitter on,
the “Scan” menu (or a message in-
forming you that no scanner is present
in the transmitter) appears on the
screen when you release the button:
For information on the function and operation of the
scanner please refer to the separate scanner instruc-
tions and Chapter (Î 20.6.2.).
Indicator for
the throttle
and throttle
limiter con-
trols
ROYAL
pro
24
10.6. The Status displays
“Status display” is the term we use for the four differ-
ent screen displays which appear as options when the
transmitter is “started” (with or without RF trans-
mission).
You can switch between the individual Status displays
using the “” or “” buttons.
10.6.1. Status display
1 (standard)
1
2
3
4
5
6
Bars
Line 1 Status of the 3-D digi-adjusters.
Numerous set-up parameters can be allocated to
the 3-D digi-adjusters, which can then be adjusted
while the model is flying (Î 20.1.)
Line 2 Current model memory with memory number and
model name: 5:GLIDER
Line 3 Actual operating voltage of the transmitter battery in
numeric form and as a graphic bar display
Line 4
Transmitter type: ROYAL
pro
7, 9 or 12
Line 5 Owner’s name (Î 14.5.3.)
Line 6 Operating time for the currently active model mem-
ory (Î 18.2.)
Bars The four bars at the sides and bottom indicate the
current trim positions for the four primary control
functions / sticks
10.6.2. Status display
2 (flight phases)
1
2
3
4
5
Bars
Line 1 Status of the 3-D digi-adjusters (Î Status display 1)
Line 2 Current model memory (Î Status display 1)
Line 3 Actual battery voltage (Î Status display 1)
Line 4 Switch used to select the current flight phase (Î 19.4.)
Line 5
Current flight phase with number and name: 1:NORMAL
Bars Current trim positions (Î Status display 1)
10.6.3. Status display
3 (timers)
The screen only displays those timers to which a
switch has been assigned. After the timer the screen
shows the associated switch (in this example: the Slot
timer is controlled using switch “P”):
1
2
3
4
5
Bars
Line 1 Status of the 3-D digi-adjusters (Î Status display 1)
Line 2
Direction of operation of each timer (here: counting
down)
Line 3 Slot timer (Î 18.3.)
Line 4 Sum timer (Î 18.4.)
Line 5 Interval timer (Î 18.5.)
Bars Current trim positions (Î Status display 1)
10.6.4. Status display 4 (system information)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Line 1
Transmitter type: ROYAL
pro
7, 9 or 12
Software version: e.g. 2.53,
Loaded language set:
e.g. DE/EN (German / English)
Line 2
Channel number and frequency, or “No RF”
if no RF module is installed
Line 3
Modulation: FM/PPM 6 to 12 or FM/M-PCM
Line 4 Actual battery voltage
Line 5 Available battery charge quantity
Line 6 Calculated remaining transmitter operating time
based on the available battery charge quantity and
the actual current drain. Only displayed if an RF sig-
nal is being transmitted.
The red LED must flash!
Line 7
Transmitter operating time, up to 1000.0 hours,
then restarts at 0.0 h
ROYALpro12 2.53 DE/EN
CH:
066 35.060MHz
Modulation FM/PPM 9
Batt. voltage 7.81V
Battery charge 1699mAh
Remaining time 8.1h
Operating time 14.8h
Manual
25
11. The “ROYAL
pro
” philosophy
11.1. Operating the ROYAL
pro
11.1.1. Using the keypad
The ROYAL
pro
is programmed using the keypad and
the two 3-D digi-adjusters. There are eleven buttons in
all.
a. Six buttons for direct access to main menus
L
Setup (Configuration)
H
Control
G
Mixer
K
Servo
A
Timer
I
Memory
b. Special function buttons
F
Allocate 3-D digi-adjuster for:
altering values in flight Î 20.1.
calibrating servos Î 17.1.2.
Activate scanner when switching on
REV/CLR
Reverse (REVerse) Erase (CLeaR).
Many set-up values (% values) can be restored to
the default setting using this button
ENTER
Menu / Open / Close parameter
Cursor up / Increase values
Cursor down / Reduce values
c. Text input buttons
The ten buttons with inscribed letters are used for en-
tering text (name of transmitter owner, model, free
mixers, assignment lists):
Text is entered in the manner familiar from mobile
telephones. The two 3-D digi-adjusters can be used to
select individual characters in the input field.
The characters which can be called up by rapidly and
repeatedly pressing one button are printed in small
script below the direct menu access buttons (row 1)
and above the working buttons (row 2).
When you enter a letter at the start of a text input, or
after a space, this is automatically displayed as a
capital letter, with the following letters automatically
set in lower case. If you wish to enter a series of capi-
tal letters, simply ‘leaf past’ the lower-case letters, and
the capitals will follow. When you select a letter, the
cursor automatically moves on to the next position.
The cursor can also be moved forward or back manu-
ally to any position using either of the two 3-D digi-
adjusters.
Text input is concluded by pressing the ENTER but-
ton. The screen now displays a request to input text:
Clear rest
of line?
Yes ->
REV
/CLR
No -> ENTER
x Pressing the REV/CLR button erases all inputs af-
ter the last position of the cursor.
x Pressing ENTER leaves the text unchanged.
Entering special characters:
Certain buttons can also be used to enter characters
in addition to the printed ones, such as accented let-
ters and other special characters:
Button Character
ABC1
A B C Ä 1 a b c ä
DEF2
D E F 2 d e f
GHI3
G H I 3 g h i
JKL4
J K L 4 j k l
MNO5
M N O Ö 5 m n o ö
PQR6
P Q R 6 p q r
STU7
S T U Ü 7 s t u ü
VWX8
V W X 8 v w x
YZ_9
Y Z 9 y z _ ( ) { }
/-#0
0 / ? ! - + % # & < > *
Space character
11.1.2. Using buttons when operating a model
The REV/CLR button resets all timers to
the set alarm times.
The 3-D digi-adjusters can be allocated
to any parameter which is marked in the menus with a
hyphen “-” (Î 20.1.).
Button
F is used to unlock / lock the values allo-
cated for adjustment:
Fig. 11.1.2.1.: Aileron Expo allocated to the right-hand 3-D
digi-adjuster
a. Value locked b. Value unlocked
ROYAL
pro
26
11.2. The ROYAL
pro
menu structure
You will find a diagram of the ROYAL
pro
menu struc-
ture in the coloured A3 supplement to the manual.
Please refer to the supplement when reading this sec-
tion.
The ROYAL
pro
has four menu levels:
x Status displays (not shown in the Overview)
x Main menu
x Menu
x Sub-menu
The Status display supplies information about the
transmitter and the current model, and is divided up
over four screens. You can switch between the dis-
plays using the Ÿ and ź buttons. The Status display
appears when you switch the transmitter on, or when
you leave the main menus. The four Status displays
are not shown in the Overview. Please see Chapter
(Î 10.6.) for details regarding the Status display.
The six main menus are called up using the six direct
menu access buttons. Within the main menus all you
will find is branches leading into the menus them-
selves. Each branch is always indicated by a series of
four full stops.
The menus can contain both branches into sub-
menus, as well as parameters.
The sub-menus only contain parameters.
Parameters are variable values which appear in
menus and sub-menus. Some only provide infor-
mation, but others are in a form which can be altered.
Invariable parameters are skipped when you leaf
through the menus.
Status displays
(Î 10.6.)
Entry into the main menus using one
of the six menu buttons
Main menus
xxxx ....
Branches into menus
Menus
xxxx ....
Branches into sub-menus
Variable parameters
Fixed parameters (information only)
Sub-menus
Variable parameters
Fixed parameters (information only)
Fig. 11.2.1.: Menu structure in principle
Setup
Main menu: Setup
with branches into the menus
Menu: Assignment
with parameters
(Mode, Assignment, Name)
and branches
into sub-menus
(TX Controls, Switches)
Sub-menu: Assign Controls
with parameters
TX control
Operating element
Idle position and status
Fig. 11.2.2.: Typical menu structure
11.3. What do the sticks, sliders and
switches do?
Or: Global assignments (lists)
11.3.1. What does “Assignment” mean?
The assignment defines which transmitter control is
used to operate a function in the transmitter or the
model. This information is stored in the assignment
lists.
The software differentiates between
Controls (Î 11.3.2.) and Switches (Î 11.3.3.).
The assignment lists do not include the basic func-
tions (aileron / elevator / rudder for fixed-wing models,
roll / pitch / yaw / collective pitch for helicopters).
These functions are covered by the stick mode
(Modes 1 to 4).
11.3.2. What are transmitter controls?
Controls are all those elements on the transmitter
which operate functions in the model (servos, speed
controllers, gyros, …). The following controls are
available:
a. Sticks
(e.g. for throttle, spoilers, ...).
b. Sliders E and F
(e.g. for flaps, mixture, gyro, ...).
c. Switches and buttons, including those on the
sticks
(e.g. for retracts, aero-tow release, ...).
Manual
27
The menu ¡Setup, Assignment, Controls contains
a list of all the transmitter controls which are managed
by the software:
¡Assign.Controls
¨Exit
Throttle ‡ #*
Spoiler E '
Flap/RPM F #
L. gear --- -
Tow rel. --- -
ªBrake --- -
In this menu you can change the assignment of the
controls in any way you wish, i.e. you can change the
arrangement to suit your personal preferences.
11.3.3. What are switches?
Switches are all those elements which control trans-
mitter functions such as Dual-Rate, Combi-Switch,
Timer, Flight phases, …
The menu ¡Setup, Assignment, Switches con-
tains a list of all the switches which are managed by
the software.
Transmitter controls can also be used to switch cer-
tain functions. Example: the motor run time can be
recorded using the timer ´ (sum timer), if you use the
throttle control as the switch to control this timer. It
makes no difference whether the throttle control is a
stick, a slider or a switch:
¡Assign.Switches
¨Exit
DR-ai <L #*
DR-el <L #*
DR-ru <L #*
CS/DTC <N #
Throttle-cut H> „
ª|Slot --- -
In this menu you can change the switch assignment
exactly as you wish, i.e. to suit your personal prefer-
ences and requirements.
11.3.4. Why “global” assignments?
Every model pilot has his own ideas about the ideal
layout of the transmitter controls.
Examples: when flying power models a pilot may al-
ways control throttle with the stick, but use switch G
for his electric gliders. The glider aero-tow release
might always be switch I. When flying model helicop-
ters he may always control idle-up with slider F.
To ensure that our pilot is not obliged to enter this in-
formation for each new model, he uses “global” as-
signment lists for each model category (maximum five
lists). Once he has defined the control assignment at
this point, it can be used for as many models of the
same category as he likes.
The fact that these lists can be altered at any time is
one factor in the flexibility of the ROYAL
pro
. How-
ever, a high level of standardisation is important in
order to avoid confusion, and that is why we limit the
number of assignment lists to five. This level of stan-
dardisation also helps to avoid operating the wrong
controls in flight.
If you subsequently wish to change an assignment,
perhaps to take into account new methods of control
or habits, all you have to do is enter the change in the
appropriate assignment list, i.e. you do not need to do
this separately for each individual model.
The menu ¡Assignment contains all the information
concerning the current assignment for your model.
Example:
¡Assignment
¨Exit
Mode 1: è é
Assignment 1
Name BASIC
Controls ....
Switches ....
The function of the individual menu lines is as follows:
Line Menu point Meaning
1.
Mode 1: è é
For Mode 1 this means:
Elevator and rudder on the
left stick;
can also be changed in this
menu point
2.
Assign-
ment
1
Selected list is No. 1;
can also be changed in this
menu point
3.
Name BASIC
Name of the list;
can also be changed in this
menu point
4.
Controls ....
On to control assignment list
5.
Switches ....
On to switch assignment list
11.3.5. Which assignment lists are available?
The ROYAL
pro
provides five assignment lists: three
are pre-defined, and bear the names POWER, GLIDER,
HELI. Lists 4 and 5 are empty; by default they are
named “4.......” and “5.......”. All five lists and
their names can be changed in any way you wish.
3:
HELI
4:
-----
5:
-----
Control
Switch
Control
Assigned control
Status
Function
Assigned switch
Status
L. gear
Fig. 11.3.5.1.: Global assignment lists
Please refer to (Î 22.1.) for information on the default
assignments.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
ROYAL
pro
28
11.3.6. How are the assignment lists arranged?
The assignment lists contain all the transmitter con-
trols and switches which can be used when program-
ming.
The second column indicates the control element to
which the transmitter control or switch is linked. The
arrows adjacent to the switch code letters indicate
whether the switch is positioned on the left (<N) or
right (G>) side of the transmitter.
The third column (Status) includes an up-arrow or a
down-arrow; these have the following meaning for
transmitter controls and switches:
a. In the Controls assignment list
The arrow shows the location of the “Idle” position
of the transmitter control.
' = forward, # = back
The asterisk “*” following the arrow appears when
the control is actually in the Idle position.
Example:
¡Assign.Controls
¨Exit
Throttle E #*
Spoiler ‡ '*
Flap/RPM F #
For fixed-wing models: Idle for throttle, spoiler /
landing gear retracted.
For helicopters: coll. pitch min., motor OFF position
for throttle limiter.
For the other transmitter controls the Idle position
only has a subordinate significance.
b. In the assignment list Switches
The arrow indicates the direction in which the func-
tion is switched on.
DR-ai (Dual-Rate aileron), CS/DTC (Combi-Switch /
Direct Throttle), Throttle-cut, Timers etc.
The asterisk “*” following the arrow appears when
the switch is currently at the ON position (function
active).
Example:
¡Assign.Switches
¨Exit
DR-ai <L #
DR-el <L #
DR-ru <L #
CS/DTC <N '*
Throttle-cut H> „
ª|Slot --- -
11.3.7. How are the assignment lists used?
When you set up a new model in a memory (Î 12.2.6.
and 13.2.6.), you can select one of the five lists.
The name of the list is intended to describe the model
category for which the list was created, rather than a
specific model (i.e. “E-glider”, rather than “Cularis”).
Suggested names: E-heli, E-glider if, for example,
you wish to use different assignments for your electric
models to their equivalents with I.C. motors.
Tip: we recommend that you set up the list to cover
the most complex model which you own in that par-
ticular category. For example, it presents no problem
if the Glider list includes, say, assigned transmitter
controls for flaps and retractable wheel, even if your
current model is just a simple rudder / elevator glider.
11.3.8. Summary: “Global assignments”
x Five global assignment lists are available.
x Three assignment lists are pre-defined.
x All list names and assignments can be changed.
11.4. Global mixer definitions
11.4.1. Why “global” mixer definitions?
As in the case of assignments, there are particular
mixer configurations which modellers use again and
again. For this reason we have separated the mixer
definitions from the process of setting up the indi-
vidual mixer input values for a particular model.
The definition is entered “globally” in menu L
(Setup), Mixer def. (see illustration below). Once
defined, a mixer can be used as often as you like for
any number of models.
When a mixer is defined, the following points are de-
termined:
1. A name for the mixer.
2. A maximum of five mixer inputs.
3. A switch for the mixer inputs.
4. The method of working of the mixer inputs.
¡Define mixer
¨Exit
Name AILERON+
1 Aileron ON ™2
2 Spoiler ON ›+
3 FLAP ON š
4 Ele-Tr Mx1 š
5 -------- ---- --
2. 3. 4.
The magnitude of the mixer inputs is set individually
for each model in the menu £Mixer.
Example:
£5x Mixer.AILERON+
¨Exit
™2 ---- trv
Aileron__—----- 80% *
Spoiler — OFF OFF *
Flap — OFF OFF *
Ele —Tr — OFF OFF G-
--------—-----------
In the line above the mixer inputs, the screen shows
the method of working of the selected mixer input and
the meaning of the variable values.
1.
Spoiler on the stick,
Idle forward, active
Flap on slider F,
Idle back, not active
Dual-Rate on switch L
(
ON
p
osition back
)
Combi-Switch on switch N
(
ON
p
osition forward
)
Throttle-cut on button H
(
active when button is
p
ressed
)
Slot timer
(
no switch assi
g
ned
)
Manual
29
11.4.2. Which global mixers are available?
The ROYAL
pro
includes fourteen free mixers. Five of
them are pre-defined, and can be used immediately.
All the mixers - including the pre-defined ones - can
be changed exactly as you wish.
Please refer to the overview (Î 22.2.) “Pre-defined
mixers” for information on the default mixer definitions.
Tip: the mixer definition should cover the most com-
plex application for which you are likely to want to use
the mixer. If the model is a glider whose ailerons you
“only” wish to raise for landing, you can use the
AILERON+ mixer. The inputs Flap and Ele -tr can
simply be left at “OFF” when you are setting up the
mixer inputs in the menu £Mixer. However, those
inputs remain available in the definition even though
they have no effect on the present model, assuming
that they are not set up and activated for that model.
11.4.3. Mixer names with a “+” suffix
You will see a “+” suffix attached to the names of the
pre-defined mixers. This indicates that, for example,
the AILERON+ mixer includes other inputs in addition
to the basic Aileron function. These mixer names are
also displayed in capital letters (ELEVATR+, AILERON+,
FLAP+, …), to differentiate them more clearly from the
basic inputs (Elevator, Aileron, Flap).
11.4.4. How are the free mixers used in fixed-
wing model aircraft?
You might care to think of the free mixer definitions as
a collection of building blocks, from which you select
the most suitable for any particular model. The “se-
lecting” is carried out when you assign the servos in
the model. Only if a mixer is assigned to at least one
servo (menu ¤Servo, Assignment) does the mixer
appear in menu G (Mixer); you can then set the values
for the individual mixer inputs.
The illustration below shows the building block collec-
tion and the fourteen mixer building blocks:
Fig. 11.4.4.1.: The free mixers
!
Important: a maximum of five free mixers can be
used simultaneously in any one model memory.
11.4.5. How are mixers used in helicopters?
For model helicopters the mixers required to control
the various rotor head types and the tail rotor are pre-
programmed as standard. As a result, the free mixers
(1 to 14) cannot be used when assigning the servos
for model helicopters.
However, there are three free transmitter control mix-
ers, and they can be used to mix the signals from the
controls ROLL, PITCH and YAW into the transmitter con-
trols ROLL, PITCH, YAW, THROTTLE or COLLECTIVE
PITCH.
The most important application for these facilities is
the various compensation mixers, in which all the con-
trol functions are mixed into THROTTLE. For exam-
ple, these mixers make it possible to compensate for
the increased power requirement when the pilot
makes deliberate control commands.
The settings in these mixers might look as follows:
£Comp.Mix.CRUISE
©
Aileron ™ -> Throttle
Travel – 10%
Elevator™ -> Throttle
Travel – 10%
Rudder š -> Throttle
Travel+ – -5%
Travel- – 17%
Roll and Pitch (-axis) are mixed into Throttle
symmetrically. Separate values for “left” and “right”
can be entered for yaw.
11.4.6. Summary of the “free mixers”
x Fourteen free mixers are available.
x Mixer names (max. eight characters), mixer inputs,
switches and method of working can be changed
in all mixer definitions.
x Up to five free mixers can be used simultaneously
for a particular model.
x Every mixer you use can be assigned to as many
servo channels as you wish.
x The menu £Mixer only displays those mixers to
which at least one servo has been assigned.
x Only Control mixers are available for helicopters.
11.5. Model templates
11.5.1. Why are model templates needed?
The model templates make it much easier and quicker
to set up new models, as a large part of the routine
work is accomplished just by selecting the appropriate
template. Use a template, and you can immediately
start entering the settings for the model.
The model templates themselves cannot be changed.
However, when you set up a new model and load a
copy of the template into the model memory, you can
then access it and make changes as needed.
Advantage: since the template itself cannot be al-
tered (even accidentally), it is always available in the
exact form described in the Manual.
ROYAL
pro
30
11.5.2. What do the model templates contain?
a. Basic mixer settings
The main input is set to full servo travel; all other
inputs to OFF.
b. Basic transmitter control settings
Travel and Dual-Rate to 100%
Expo to 0%
Trim increment to 1.5%.
c. Basic servo settings
Servo travels 100%
Centre to 0%.
d. Basic flight phase settings
All four possible flight phases are assigned names.
However, only the following are unlocked by default:
- for fixed-wing models: NORMAL
- for helicopters: HOVER and AUTOROT (Autorotation).
11.5.3. Which model templates are available?
1. BASIC 7. HELImech
2. ACRO 8. HELIccpm
3. HOTLINER
4. DELTA
5. GLIDER
6. 4 FLAPS
Amongst these eight model templates you are bound
to find one which is so close to your model that only
minor corrections are necessary to produce a perfect
match.
For a detailed description of the model templates
please refer to section (Î 21.1.) “Fixed-wing models”
and (Î 21.2.) “Helicopters”.
11.6. Servo configuration
The term servo configuration refers to the order in
which the servos are connected to the receiver output
sockets. There are four possible choices:
a. M-PCM
for use with the new sequence optimised for the
new M-PCM transmission mode
b. MPX-UNI
the standard sequence used for many years by
MULTIPLEX and many other makes of transmitter
c. FUTABA
d. JR.
If you have already flown the model with a FUTABA or
JR transmitter, we recommend that you select the cor-
responding configuration.
Note: the receiver output assignment for the four pos-
sible configurations can be found in the Overview
(Î 21.3.) “Servo configuration”.
11.7. Servo calibration
The advantage of our idea of “global mixers” (Î 11.4.) is
that any change which affects multiple servos sharing
the same function only has to be changed as a single
numerical value if you wish to alter a control surface
travel.
To ensure that this procedure works properly, the con-
trol surface travels for servos with the same function
must be set to the same values. Any mechanical dis-
crepancies are corrected in this way.
Example: when a 100% aileron signal is present, the
left aileron deflects by 13.5 mm, the right only 12 mm.
The manufacturer of the model recommends a travel
of 11 mm. You can now calculate the required servo
travel as a percentage value, and set up the model in
the menu ¤Servo.Calibrate.
Typical calculation, for left aileron:
Nominal deflection: 11.0 mm
Actual deflection: 13.5 mm
Formula: (Nom. / Act.) * 100% = (11 / 13.5) * 100%
= 81.48%
You should therefore set: 81%
For the right aileron the setting is as follows:
(11 / 12) * 100% = 91.67% = 92%
Advantage: when the calibration process is complete,
a value of 100% relating to transmitter controls and
mixers means that both ailerons deflect by 11 mm.
The following is also true: 1 mm travel equals a value
of 9%. If, for example, you now wish to raise the ailer-
ons by 2 mm for a particular task, then a mixer input
(Flap control) of 18% is necessary.
11.7.1. What can be calibrated?
Two, three or five points on the servo curve can be
accessed for the calibration process. The number of
points is determined when a new model is set up, but
for each servo this can also be changed subsequently
to any other value in the menu ¤Servo.Assign.
a. 2P (2-point curve)
Only the servo end-points (Points P1 and P5) are
changed. Between these two points the servo
travel is linear.
Application: retracts, tow release, throttle, ...
b. 3P (3-point curve)
In this case the servo centre (Point P3) can be ad-
justed in addition to the two end-points. If you off-
set the centre, the two travels between centre and
end-point remain linear, i.e. the servo curve is now
“bent”.
Application: this equates to the standard form of
servo travel adjustment.
c. 5P (5-point curve)
Adding the two intermediate curve points (Points
P2 and P4) produces a deliberately ”distorted”
servo curve.
Application: this option can be used to generate
non-linear servo travel even for control functions
for which Expo or a curve are not available.
Manual
31
11.7.2. How is the calibration carried out?
There is a separate servo calibration menu which is
accessed as follows:
Main menu (button): K
Menu: Calibrate ....
Sub-menu: 1 AILERON+ ....
Now select the point which you wish to adjust, and
press the 3-D digi-adjuster.
¤Calibr.AILERON+
¨Exit
á
0
P1 -100%
P2 ---
P3 0%
P4 ---
P5 100%
Fig. 11.7.2.1.: Servo calibration with opened % value
The value (e.g. -100%) is now open, and can be al-
tered using the 3-D digi-adjuster.
To alter the travel of one control surface you would
now have to keep the corresponding stick at one end-
point, hold a ruler against the control surface, and op-
erate the 3-D digi-adjuster with your “third hand”.
To simplify this procedure there is the allocation pro-
cess, which is described in the next section.
11.7.3. Allocation - what’s that?
!
Caution
Don’t press the allocation button F until you have set
the servos to the correct direction of rotation.
When a % value is open in the sub-menu ¤Servo.Calibrate,
press the F (allocate) button.
This action sends a control signal to the servo corres-
ponding to the stick position for the point on the servo
curve which you wish to calibrate. The vertical line in
the graph jumps to the opened point, and the cor-
responding servo can now be adjusted.
Example:
Servo 1 operates the left aileron. Point P1 defines the
down-travel. Rotating the 3-D digi-adjuster moves the
servo, and the end-point can be adjusted.
Important!
Pressing the Allocate button sends the control infor-
mation to all the servos which share the same func-
tion. This makes it easy and convenient to set up con-
trol surface travels to match each other accurately.
Examples for fixed-wing model aircraft:
Multi-flap wing
Matching left and right control surfaces to each
other (e.g. with AILERON+ at servos 1 and 5).
Separate elevators with two servos
Matching the travels.
Example for model helicopters:
Electronically mixed swashplate
Setting the swashplate exactly horizontal at the
end-points; if non-linear effects are apparent, the
process can be repeated at the intermediate posi-
tions (P2 and P4).
ROYAL
pro
32
12. Setting up a fixed-wing model
We recommend that you first read Chapter 11, which
describes the operating philosophy of the ROYAL
pro
,
before you set up a new model in a memory. This
should ensure that you have at least a basic under-
standing of the system, and will be able to carry out
the following steps more easily.
12.1. The method in principle
In this example we will set up a model memory for a
glider with a four-flap wing.
The following steps have to be carried out to ensure
that the model’s basic functions work as expected:
a. Set up new model memory 12.2.
b. Prepare transmitter controls and switches 12.3.
c. Prepare servos 12.4.
d. Activate and check mixed functions 12.5.
Example: ailerons raised as landing aid.
After these four steps you will be able to control the
model’s basic functions, i.e. aileron, elevator, rudder
and throttle. Butterfly (Crow) is activated as landing
aid.
At this point you can expand and refine the set-up:
e. Activate Combi-Switch 12.11.2.
f. Set up aileron differential 12.6.
g. Elevator trim mixers 12.7.
spoiler / throttle to elevator mixers
h. Activate the inboard wing flaps 12.8.
i. V-tail model 12.9.
j. Working with flight phases 12.10.
Assign switch
Unlock / lock / name phases
Set transition times
Adjust values
k. Further options that can be added 12.11.
Dual-Rate (D/R), Expo,
Combi-Switch, Motor run timer.
12.2. Setting up the new model in the
transmitter
12.2.1. Menu I, call up New model
a. Open the main menu Memory:
Press button I.
b. Open the menu New model:
Turn the 3-D digi-adjuster to the right as far as New
model, and open the menu
(press 3-D digi-adjuster):
¦New model
¨Exit
Memory nr. 3
Template 4 FLAPS
Servo conf. MPX-UNI
Mode 4: è é
Assignment GLIDER
OK
Note:
The new model is not stored in the memory until you
confirm the selected settings with OK (Î 12.2.7.).
12.2.2. Which model memory will be used?
New models are automatically stored in the first va-
cant memory; the memory number appears in the
menu. Since you have no influence over the memory
number, this line in the menu is skipped.
If all model memories are in use, the screen displays:
Memory nr. -1
If you nevertheless attempt to set up the new model,
the following on-screen warning appears:
No memory free
Press ENTER
12.2.3. Selecting the Template
Note:
The templates (Î 11.5.) make it much quicker and
easier to create new models, as they already contain
the essential assignments and settings. You can
check which template was used to create a particular
model by accessing the menu ¦Memory, Properties.
Turn the 3-D digi-adjuster to the right until the select
bar stands in the Template line, then press the 3-D
digi-adjuster.
Now you can select the template 4 FLAPS from the
eight available templates, using the 3-D digi-adjuster:
¦New model
¨Exit
Memory nr. 3
Template 4 FLAPS
Servo conf. MPX-UNI
Mode 4: è é
Assignment GLIDER
OK
Press the 3-D adjuster once more to confirm your
choice.
12.2.4. Selecting the servo configuration (servo
conf.)
Note:
The servo configuration (Î 11.6.) defines the order in
which the servos have to be connected to the receiver
in the model. The selected configuration is only a
suggestion, and can be changed subsequently in any
way you wish if the servos are connected to different
receiver outputs (Î Menu: K, Assignment).
Rotate the 3-D digi-adjuster to the right until the select
bar is at the Servo conf. line, then press the 3-D
digi-adjuster.
Ö 12.2.2.
Ö 12.2.3.
Ö 12.2.4.
Ö 12.2.5.
Ö 12.2.6.
Ö 12.2.7.
Manual
33
Now use the 3-D digi-adjuster to select, for example,
the MPX-UNI configuration from those available:
¦New model
¨Exit
Memory nr. 3
Template 4 FLAPS
Servo conf. MPX-UNI_
Mode 4: è é
Assignment GLIDER
OK
Press the 3-D adjuster again to confirm your choice.
By selecting the 4 FLAPS template and the servo con-
figuration MPX-UNI you automatically set the following
receiver output sequence:
MPX-UNI
1 AILERON+
2 ELEVATR+
3 Rudder
4 Throttle
5 AILERON+
6 FLAP+
7 FLAP+
8 Spoiler
9 Spoiler
See also the illustration in (Î 12.2.7.).
12.2.5. Selecting the stick mode
The stick mode defines the association between the
stick axis and the controlled function. However, the
mode affects only the functions aileron, elevator and
rudder. The way in which throttle, spoiler and flap
are controlled is defined when you assign the transmit-
ter controls (Î Menu: L, Assignment, Controls).
First consider the functions you wish to control using
the left stick, then look up the appropriate mode in
the table below.
Mode table for the left stick:
Stick movements, left stick Required
forward/back left/right mode
Rudder
1: è é
Elevator
Aileron
3: è é
Rudder
2: é è
Throttle
(or Spoiler)
Aileron
4: è é
The double arrows following the mode code numbers
indicate where elevator (
è) and rudder (é) are lo-
cated.
The stick functions for the right stick are assigned
automatically.
Example: we will assume that you want elevator and
aileron on the left stick; in which case you would se-
lect Mode 3. Rudder is now automatically on the right
stick.
Turn the 3-D digi-adjuster to the right until the select
bar is over the Mode line, then press the 3-D digi-
adjuster:
¦New model
¨Exit
Memory nr. 3
Template 4 FLAPS
Servo conf. MPX-UNI
Mode 4: è é
Assignment GLIDER
OK
You can now use the 3-D digi-adjuster to select the
stick mode you have just decided to use.
Press the 3-D digi-adjuster to confirm your choice.
12.2.6. Selecting the Assignment
At this point you can select the assignment list, which
defines which transmitter controls and switches are
used to operate the various functions.
For a glider you would of course use the assignment
list bearing the name GLIDER (No. 2).
Turn the 3-D digi-adjuster to the right until the select
bar is over the Assignment line, then press the 3-D
digi-adjuster:
¦New model
¨Exit
Memory nr. 3
Template 4 FLAPS
Servo conf. MPX-UNI
Mode 4: è é
Assignment GLIDER__
OK
Select GLIDER from the five available assignments
using the 3-D digi-adjuster.
Press the 3-D digi-adjuster to confirm your selection.
Note:
You can also change the selected assignment in any
way at any time (Menu: ¡Setup, Assignment).
12.2.7. Confirming with OK
Rotate the 3-D digi-adjuster to the right until the select
bar is at the OK line, then press the 3-D digi-adjuster.
Congratulations!
You have successfully stored a new model in the
transmitter’s memory.
If you have kept to our suggestions in the steps com-
pleted thus far, the following data is now stored in the
new model memory:
a. Receiver output sequence
1
2
4
5
6
3
7
8
9
Spoiler
Spoiler
AILERON+
Throttle
AILERON+
ELEVATR+
Rudder
FLAP+
FLAP+
Fig. 12.2.7.1.: Servo assignment with MPX-UNI configuration
ROYAL
pro
34
x Servos 1 to 9 are pre-defined
(ROYAL
pro
7: only servos 1 to 7 are possible).
x All servo assignments can be changed at any time
in any way (Menu: K Servo, Assignment).
For example, servo 4 (Throttle) could be changed
to tow-release (Tow rel.) if your model features that
function.
b. Transmitter control assignment
Aileron, elevator and rudder are defined by the stick
mode which you have selected in Step (Î 12.2.5.).
In the menu L, Assignment, Controls you will find:
x Throttle at slider E, Idle position “back”:
Throttle E #*
The asterisk ”
*
” appears after the arrow when the slider is in
the Idle position. Try moving slider E to confirm this.
x Spoiler on the stick, idle position “forward”:
Spoiler ‡ '*
The asterisk ”
*
” appears when the stick is in the Idle posi-
tion (forward). Try moving the stick to confirm this.
c. Switch assignment
In the menu L, Assignment, Switches you will see:
Function Switch
DR-ai <L #
DR-el <L #
DR-ru <L #
Dual-Rate
Aileron, elevator and rudder are
switched simultaneously by L
CS/DTC <N #
Combi-Switch
(and DTC for helicopters) as-
signed to N
Throttle-cut H> „
With momentary function as-
signed to H
´Sum E '
Aggregate timer controlled by
control E (throttle) for motor run
time
Mix-1 G> #
Mixer input switch assigned to G
Phases 1-3 <O '
Flight phase switch assigned to O
Switches not in use are marked as “ --- - ”, and are
not listed here.
Tip: you can now carry out an initial check of the
working systems using the servo monitor; you don’t
need the model for this. Move to the monitor as fol-
lows:
Menu ¤Servo, Monitor:
Bar graph Percentage values
Move the sticks, sliders and switches and watch the
effects on-screen.
When you access the Monitor menu you will see the
bar graph display. Rotate the 3-D digi-adjuster to tog-
gle between the two types of display. Press the 3-D
digi-adjuster to leave the servo monitor.
12.2.8. Entering the model name
The model you have just stored initially bears the
name of the template you are using. In our example
this would be 4 FLAPS. To help you keep track of
your models, you should change this default name to
the actual model name.
This is the procedure:
a. Open the main menu ¦Memory
(press button I).
b. Select the Properties menu and open it:
¦Memory
¨Exit
Select model ....
Copy ....
Erase ....
Flight phase ....
Properties ....
ªNew model ....
(Select using the 3-D digi-adjuster, then press).
c. Use the 3-D digi-adjuster again to select the Name
line, then press ENTER (or the 3-D digi-adjuster):
¦Properties
¨Exit
Template 4 FLAPS
Mode 4: è é
Assignment GLIDER
Name EasyGlid
er
At this point you can enter a model name with a
maximum of sixteen characters; it should clearly
identify the model. This name will also appear in
the Status display.
Text input using the keypad (Î 11.1.1.).
12.3. Preparing the controls / switches
In the 4 FLAPS template the following transmitter con-
trols are already prepared in addition to the basic
functions of aileron, elevator and rudder:
a. Spoiler
controlled by stick, idle position (i.e. spoilers
retracted) forward.
b. Flap
controlled by slider F.
c. Throttle
controlled by slider E, Idle position back.
12.3.1. Selecting / changing the idle position
for spoiler / throttle
If you wish to change the Idle position, you must carry
out this procedure:
a. Open main menu ¡Setup (press button L).
b. Select (3-D digi-adjuster) and open (press 3-D digi-
adjuster) menu Assignment.
c. Select (3-D digi-adjuster) and open (press 3-D digi-
adjuster) sub-menu Controls.
d. Select (3-D digi-adjuster) and open (press 3-D digi-
adjuster) Spoiler control.
Manual
35
e. Press ENTER to confirm the warning message:
Standard list!
The warning has to be confirmed because any
change affects all models which are set up using
the same assignment list (GLIDER).
The line in the menu must look like this:
Spoiler ‡ '
f. Now move the transmitter control to the desired
idle position; the arrow will change its direction
when you do this (' , #). The asterisk (*) is always
displayed.
g. Press the 3-D digi-adjuster or ENTER to confirm:
Spoiler ‡ #*
In our example the idle position for Spoiler is “stick
back”.
The idle position for Throttle can be changed in the
same manner.
For Flap (camber-changing flaps) there is no need to
change the idle position, as the deflection takes place
on both sides of centre.
12.3.2. Changing the switch ON position
The position of the “ON” state can be changed for all
switches which are used in an assignment list.
Example Combi-Switch (CS/DTC):
In the pre-defined assignment list GLIDER the Combi-
Switch is active when the switch N is in the “back” po-
sition. If you want the ON state to be “forward”, please
use this procedure:
a. Open the main menu ¡Setup (press button ¡).
b. Select (3-D digi-adjuster) and open (press the 3-D
digi-adjuster) the Assignment menu.
c. Select (3-D digi-adjuster) the sub-menu Switches
and open the setting (press the 3-D digi-adjuster).
d. Select (3-D digi-adjuster) and open (press 3-D digi-
adjuster) the switch CS/DTC.
e. Confirm the warning message: Standard list!
by pressing ENTER.
The warning has to be confirmed because any
change affects all models which are set up using
the same assignment list (GLIDER).
When switch N is forward, the line in the menu
must look like this:
CS/DTC <N '*
f. Now move the switch to your preferred position for
Combi-Switch “ON”. The arrow changes its direc-
tion (' , #). The asterisk (*) is always displayed.
g. Press the 3-D digi-adjuster or ENTER to confirm:
CS/DTC <N '*
12.4. Preparing servos
In this section the settings for the outboard wing flaps
are entered. The inner wing flaps are added in section
(Î 12.8.).
12.4.1. Checking / changing the servo assignment
At the servo assignment stage the following as-
pects are determined:
x the receiver outputs to which the servos have to
be connected,
x the signal format which the servos require (MPX
or UNI), and
x the number of variable curve points (2, 3 or 5)
required for servo travel and centre calibration.
Note: defaults
In the 4 FLAPS template all the servos are set to the
UNI signal format and three (3) curve points by default.
This is the procedure:
a. Open the main menu ¤Servo (press button ¤).
b. Select (3-D digi-adjuster) and open (press 3-D digi-
adjuster) the menu Assignment.
c. In this menu the assignment for all receiver outputs
can be changed in any way you like.
In our example we will change servo 4 from Throt-
tle to Tow release (Tow rel.):
d. Select (3-D digi-adjuster) and open (press 3-D digi-
adjuster) Servo 4:
¤Servo.Assign
¨Exit
1 AILERON+ UNI 3P
2 ELEVATR+ UNI 3p
3 Rudder UNI 3P
4 Throttle UNI 3P
5 AILERON+ UNI 3P
ª6 FLAP+ UNI 3P
e. Select Tow rel. (3-D digi-adjuster) and move on
to Signal format (press 3-D digi-adjuster).
f. For example: if you are using a servo with MULTI-
PLEX signal format for the tow release, you can
switch to MPX (rotate 3-D digi-adjuster) at this
point.
4 Tow rel. UNI 3P
g. Move to the number of curve points (press the 3-D
digi-adjuster again):
4 Tow rel. UNI 2P
h. Two points (2P) are sufficient for the tow release,
since only the two end-points need to be adjusted.
A tow release is normally operated using a two-
position switch as transmitter control, since inter-
mediate positions would offer no advantage.
i. Press the 3-D digi-adjuster or ENTER to confirm.
The number 4 is highlighted, and you can now se-
lect a different servo:
4 Tow rel. UNI 2P
ROYAL
pro
36
12.4.2. Checking / changing the direction of
servo rotation
It is important to check the direction of rotation of the
servos and correct that aspect (if necessary) before
making adjustments to the centre position and travels.
Checking:
Move the transmitter controls for the individual control
functions in turn (aileron, elevator, rudder), and check
whether the control surfaces move in the correct di-
rection.
This is the procedure for altering the direction of
rotation:
a. Open the main menu ¤Servo
(press button ¤).
b. Open the Calibration menu (Calibrate)
and select a Servo.
c. Select line á and open Parameter:
¤Calibr.AILERON+
¨Exit
á
0
Now you can reverse the direction of servo rotation
using the REV/CLR button. The effect is immediate-
ly visible in the graph (curve reverses).
Tip:
If you move the associated stick slightly away from
the centre position and then press the REV/CLR
button, the servo will jump to a new position when
you reverse it. This is an easy way to check that
you have selected the “right” servo.
d. When the direction of rotation is correct, press the
3-D digi-adjuster or the ENTER button to confirm
your choice, then quit the menu via Exit and se-
lect the next servo you wish to adjust.
!
Note:
Please don’t start adjusting servo travels and centre
positions until you have corrected the direction of rota-
tion for all the servos. If you subsequently reverse the
servo, you will need to carry out the calibration pro-
cess again.
12.4.3. Calibrating servos
= setting the centre and maximum travels
In the menu ¤Servo.Calibrate (Î 11.7.) you can
adjust the travels (P1 and P5), the centre positions
(P3) and the intermediate points (P2 and P4) for all
servos in such a way that the servos take up the cor-
rect idle position, move evenly across their range of
travel, and reach the appropriate end-points.
!
If you wish your models to fly accurately, precise
servo calibration is a fundamental requirement!
!
The travel you set at this point cannot be ex-
ceeded (travel limit).
!
Always set the largest travel which the servo will
be required to carry out.
Example: when the ailerons are raised for glide path
control, the ailerons deflect up by 20 mm, but only 12
mm deflection is required for AILERON control. If the
ailerons are used as camber-changing flaps, the re-
quired travel is just 3 mm. At the calibration stage
point P1 (and P5) must be adjusted so that the aileron
travel is 20 mm.
This is the procedure for adjusting servo centre:
a. Open the main menu ¤Servo
(press button ¤).
b. Open the Calibration menu (Calibrate)
and select the servo.
c. Select line P3 and open Parameter:
¤Calibr.AILERON+
¨Exit
á
0
P1 -100%
P2 ---
P3
0
%
P4 ---
P5 100%
!
Note: first carry out a hardware “calibration”!
Now press button F. This generates the “true” cen-
tre, without the influence of the trim or mixer inputs on
the servo.
If the servo is not in the desired centre position at this
stage, it is essential to correct the control surface po-
sition mechanically (by re-positioning the output arm
on the servo, or otherwise adjusting the linkage).
Wherever possible, the fine-tuning for Point P3 of
servo calibration should not exceed ±15%.
d. Now use one of the two 3-D digi-adjusters to set
the control surface to the desired centre position.
Any adjustments you make are immediately visible
on the model itself.
e. When the centre point is correct, press the 3-D
digi-adjuster or the ENTER button to confirm, quit
the menu via Exit, and select the next servo you
wish to adjust.
Manual
37
This is the procedure for setting maximum servo
travel (control surface deflection):
Tip: first adjust the mechanical linkage
Always adjust the mechanical linkages on the model
as accurately as you can before you carry out any
(electronic) adjustments at the transmitter:
x Fit the output arm on the servo output shaft at right-
angles to the line of the pushrod. This eliminates
any mechanical differential.
x At the servo:
Connect the pushrod as close to the centre as pos-
sible, and set maximum servo travel. This reduces
the effect of play in the gearbox, and exploits the
servo’s torque to the full.
x At the control surface:
Connect the pushrod as far out as possible on the
horn. This reduces the effect of play in the linkage,
and transmits the servo’s power to the control sur-
face in the most efficient way possible.
a. Open the main menu ¤Servo
(press button ¤).
b. Open the menu Calibrate and select the servo.
c. Select line P1 and open Parameter:
¤Calibr.AILERON+
¨Exit
á
0
P1
-100
%
P2 ---
P3 0%
P4 ---
P5 100%
d. Allocating “maximum” using button F
Now press button F. This generates the largest
possible value - the maximum - for all servos which
share the same basic function (or mixed function),
enabling you to set the maximum servo travel (control
surface deflection) regardless of the position of the
transmitter control, trims and any transmitter control
and mixer settings.
Note: moving the stick or pressing button F again
cancels this allocation!
Now test the function by operating the servo using
the associated stick. To re-allocate simply press
button F again.
e. Conclude the calibration process for P1
(press the 3-D digi-adjuster or the ENTER button).
! Note regarding “allocation”
Allocating the maximum in this way saves you the
bother of holding the stick at one end-point, and en-
ables you to use both hands in order to measure the
control surface deflection on the model. If necessary
you can make corrections using the 3-D digi-adjuster.
Calibrating multiple servos with the same function
Example: setting up the left and right ailerons
Servos 1 and 5 are assigned as AILERON+ (mixed
function). In the Calibration menu (Calibrate) you
open point P1 for servo 1. If you now press button F
to allocate maximum, both ailerons will immediately
take up the same end-point (e.g. up-travel). At this
point you can conveniently measure the control sur-
face deflection for servo 1 and adjust it using the 3-D
digi-adjuster, or alter it to match the travel of the ai-
leron on the other wing.
! Note: maximum servo travel = ±110%
If necessary you can increase servo travel on both
sides up to the maximum of 110%.
f. Repeat the procedure for point P5 starting at step c.
(if you have selected a five-point curve for the
servo concerned, you can also adjust P2 and P4
using the same method).
g. Quit the menu via ¨Exit, and adjust the remaining
servos in the same manner.
12.5. Adjusting ailerons, and activating
landing aid
(Mixer AILERON+)
This is the procedure for defining the mixer
AILERON+:
If you have not yet changed anything in the mixer
definition, the AILERON+ mixer is defined as follows:
5
1
Further servos
if required
Fig. 12.5.1.: The AILERON+ mixer in principle
The two aileron servos are controlled by the trans-
mitter controls Aileron, Spoiler, Flap and Elevator
without trim.
The mixer input Ele -Tr (Elevator without trim) is only
required for the “SnapFlap” function (elevator to ai-
leron mixer), and is selected using switch “G”. The “-”
following the G means that the switch is in the OFF
position.
ROYAL
pro
38
In the menu ¡Setup, Mixer def., 4 AILERON+ you
will find the following definition:
¡Define mixer
¨Exit
Name AILERON+
1 Aileron ON ™2
2 Spoiler ON ›+
3 Flap ON š
4 Ele -Tr Mx1 š
5 -------- ---- ---
The mixer input 1 Aileron works as follows:
1 Aileron
ON always active
™ symmetrical
2 alternating direction
The control surface travel generated by the aileron
stick is set in the menu £Mixer, AILERON+. The de-
fault settings are as follows:
£5x Mixer.AILERON+
¨Exit
Aileron —
—
----- 100% *
Spoiler — OFF OFF *
Flap — OFF OFF *
Ele -Tr — OFF OFF G-
--------—----- -----
The inputs Aileron, Spoiler and Flap are always
active (*). A value for travel is only set for Aileron
(100%). Since the method of working of the mixer input
is set to “symmetrical”, the aileron travel is the same
up and down (Differential (Î 12.6.)).
The Spoiler and Flap controls have no effect on the
AILERON+ servos (all inputs are OFF).
If the model has no airbrakes, the ailerons can be set
to deflect up as a landing aid (glide path control). In
the template 4 FLAPS, which we have used for the
new model, the mixer AILERON+ is assigned to the
aileron servos. This function is controlled by the
transmitter control Spoiler.
We use the term “spoiler” for the transmitter controls
and mixer inputs which are used as glide path control
or for “braking” the model (airbrakes, ailerons up, but-
terfly (crow)).
The landing aid (both ailerons up) is activated by set-
ting a value for the Spoiler input.
12.6. Differential aileron travel
Aileron differential means: the travel of the down-
going aileron is smaller than that of the up-going one.
Differential is necessary because the down-going ai-
leron generates greater drag than the up-going ai-
leron, and this tends to counteract the desired direc-
tion of the turn. The model yaws (swings around its
vertical axis).
The Differential setting defines the percentage by
which the down-going aileron travel is reduced relative
to that of the up-going aileron. At 50% differential the
down-deflection is half as great as the up-deflection.
The higher the percentage value, the smaller the
travel of the down-going aileron.
If you set 100% differential, the ailerons only deflect
up; there is no down-travel at all. This special setting
is sometimes termed Split mode.
Aileron differential can be set to a different value for
each flight phase separately.
12.6.1. Activating differential
Aileron differential is located in the Mixer menu.
a. Open the main menu G
Mixer (press button G).
b. Select and open the Ail.Diff. menu,
select and open the Mode menu point:
£Ail.Diff..NORMAL
¨Exit
Mode OFF .m
Diff. – 50%
There are three different modes for Differential:
xOFF x
No differential.
ON x
Differential always effective with the value which is
set at Diff. (flight phase specific).
+SPOILER
When spoilers (or Butterfly) are extended, aileron
differential is suppressed in order to maintain ade-
quate aileron response on the landing approach.
c. Press ENTER (or press the 3-D digi-adjuster) to
close this menu point.
12.6.2. Setting the differential value
a. Open the main menu G Mixer (press button G).
b. Select and open the Ail.Diff. menu, then select
and open the menu point Diff.:
£Ail.-Diff..NORMAL
¨Exit
Mode +SPOILER
Differ. – 50%
This value applies for Flight Phase 2, NORMAL
50% is a useful starting point for carrying out ex-
periments with aileron differential.
!
If you allocate aileron differential to one of the
two 3-D digi-adjusters (-), you can adjust the value
while the model is in the air (Î 20.1.).
Values marked in this
way can be allocated
to the 3-D digi-
adjuster, and varied in
fli
g
ht.
Manual
39
12.7. Adjusting elevator, activating ele-
vator mixers
(Mixer ELEVATR+)
In the template 4 FLAPS the elevator servo is already
assigned to the mixer ELEVATR+. Various mixers are
added to the signal in order to compensate for un-
wanted trim changes (e.g. from Spoiler or Throttle).
This is how the mixer is defined:
¡Define mixer
¨Exit
Name ELEVATR+
1 Elevator ON š
2 Spoiler ON œ
3 Flap ON š
4 Thr -Tr ON ›-
5 -------- --- ---
12.7.1. Spoiler to elevator = Spoiler compen-
sation
(Spoiler input to ELEVATR+ mixer)
When the spoilers are extended (or when Butterfly is
activated), many models require elevator trim correc-
tion.
The default method of working of the Spoiler input in
the elevator mixer is single-sided with two curve
points (œ). Point 2 (pt2) defines the elevator deflection
at full extension of Spoiler / Butterfly (57%). Point 1
(pt1) is generally set to half of Point 2 (pt1 = 28%) to
ensure that response to the control is linear.
If the effect of the spoilers themselves is non-linear,
then non-linear travel can be set to compensate for
this. For instance, Point 1 (pt1) could be set to ѿ or
¼ of Point 2 (pt2) to obtain this effect:
£5x Mixer.ELEVATR+
¨Exit
œ pt1 pt2
Elevator— 100% 100% *
Spoiler — 28% 57% *
Flap — OFF OFF *
Thr -Tr — OFF OFF *
--------—-----------
12.7.2. Throttle to elevator = Throttle compen-
sation
(Thr -Tr input to ELEVATR+ mixer)
Many models tend to “balloon up” when the throttle is
opened (incorrect downthrust setting); this can be cor-
rected using down-elevator (stick forward).
The default method of working of the Throttle input in
the elevator mixer is single-sided with deadband (›-).
If down-elevator correction is only required after, say,
about the 1/3 throttle point, set 33% as deadband:
£5x Mixer.ELEVATR+
¨Exit
œ- dead trv
Elevator— 100% 100% *
Spoiler — 20% 57% *
Flap — OFF OFF *
Thr -Tr — 33% OFF *
-------- ---- ----
12.8. Activating inboard flaps (camber-
changing flaps)
(Mixer FLAP+)
In the template 4 FLAPS servos 6 and 7 are assigned
to the FLAP+ mixer (camber-changing flap):
Fig. 12.8.1.: Four-flap wing
This mixer can be used to implement the following
functions:
x Butterfly (Crow)
as glide path control or landing aid
x Camber-changing flaps
for modifying the wing airfoil (thermal, speed)
x Aileron support for better manoeuvrability
x Snap-Flap (elevator to flap)
e.g. for aerobatics.
The structure of the FLAP+ mixer:
6
7
Mixer
input
Nr. Name
Mixer
name
Further servos
if required
Fig. 12.8.2.: The FLAP+ mixer in principle
These are the default settings for the FLAP+ mixer:
£5x Mixer.FLAP+
¨Exit
š trv' trv#
Flap — OFF OFF *
Spoiler — OFF 100% *
Aileron — OFF OFF *
Ele -—Tr— OFF OFF --
--------— ---------
In this mixer the Spoiler input is assigned a default
value of 100% travel (for Butterfly). All the other inputs
are OFF.
How the inputs work:
Í asymmetrical
Í single-sided, two curve points
Í asymmetrical
Í single-sided, with deadband
ROYAL
pro
40
12.8.1. Activating the Spoiler input in the mixer
FLAP+ (Butterfly)
For Butterfly (Crow) both ailerons are raised, and the
two inboard flaps are lowered.
We have already prepared the up-deflection of the ai-
lerons in Section (Î 12.5.).
At this point the travel of the two inboard flaps (servos
6 and 7) can be set:
- Open the menu £Mixer
- Select and open FLAP+
- Select the Spoiler line
- Press ENTER twice to open the
Travel parameter (trv)
- Move the Spoiler stick to the “extended” position
- Set the travel using the 3-D digi-adjuster
- Conclude with ENTER.
£5x Mixer.FLAP+
¨Exit
›+ offs trv
Flap — OFF 100% *
Spoiler — OFF -80% *
Aileron — OFF OFF *
Ele —Tr — OFF OFF --
--------— ---------
12.8.2. Activating the Flap input in the mixer
FLAP+ (camber-changing flaps)
Setting up the four wing control surfaces to act as
camber-changing flaps allows you to optimise the
model’s aerodynamic characteristics for different flight
situations.
The camber-changing flap function is controlled using
the Flap transmitter control. The default setting for this
is the right-hand slider (F) (Î 12.3.).
For speed flying all the wing flaps are raised slightly;
for thermal flying they are all drooped slightly.
For the slider to have any effect you must first “turn
up” (assign a value to) the Flap inputs in the two mixers
AILERON+ and FLAP+.
To test the system you could initially set both sides of
the Flap input to 20% in the FLAP+ mixer:
£Mixer.FLAP+
¨Exit
š trv' trv#
Flap — 20% 20% *
Spoiler — OFF -80% *
Aileron — OFF OFF *
Ele -Tr — OFF OFF --
--------— ---------
If you now move slider F, the inboard flaps should respond.
If the direction of flap deflection to slider movement
does not meet your requirements, you must change
the prefix of both travel inputs:
š trv' trv#
Flap — -20% -20% *
Note: the effect of setting different prefixes for the two
travels would be that the flaps always deflect in the
same direction from centre, i.e. whether the slider is
moved forward or back.
These settings have to be repeated for the Flap input
in the AILERON+ mixer:
£5x Mixer.AILERON+
¨Exit
š trv' trv#
Aileron —----- 100% *
Spoiler —OFF -65% *
Flap — 18% 18% *
The values must be set in such a way that the travels
for the outboard flaps (ailerons) and the inboard flaps
(flaps) are the same.
12.8.3. Activating the Aileron input in the FLAP+
mixer (aileron support by the inboard
(camber-changing) flaps)
If your model requires it, you can set up the inboard
wing flaps to act as superimposed ailerons to support
the primary ailerons. In this case the Split arrangement
is generally used. This means: the inboard flap on the
wing panel whose aileron moves up should also be
set to deflect up.
This is the procedure for setting the aileron travel of
the two inboard wing flaps (servos 6 and 7):
- Open the menu £Mixer
- Select and open FLAP+
- Select the Aileron line
- Press ENTER to open the Travel'
parameter (trv')
- Move the aileron stick to one end-point
- Use the 3-D digi-adjuster to set the required
travel
- Conclude the procedure with ENTER.
If you hold the stick to the right, only the flap in the
right wing changes its position.
£5x Mixer.FLAP+
¨Exit
š2 trv' trv#
Flap — -20% -20% *
Spoiler — OFF -80% *
Aileron — 50% OFF *
Looking at the model from the nose, this function now
produces the following travels for a right-hand turn:
100%
aileron to
AILERON+
50%
aileron to
FLAP+
100%
aileron to
AILERON+
with 50%
Ail. Diff.
Fig. 12.8.3.1.: Ailerons supported by inboard flaps
The extent to which the left aileron (as seen from the
tail) deflects is determined by the value you have set
for differential.
Manual
41
12.8.4. Activating the Elevator-Tr (Ele -Tr) input
in the FLAP+ mixer (snap-flap)
The term Snap-Flap is used when elevator is mixed
into the camber-changing flaps or ailerons. This func-
tion is prepared in the mixer AILERON+ and FLAP+.
Input 4 for both mixers is Ele -Tr.
The suffix “-Tr” means “without trim”. If you adjust the
elevator trim at the transmitter, the aileron and flap
settings are unaffected by the change.
!
Note: Snap-Flap and switches
If Snap-Flap is switched on at excessive airspeeds,
very high aerodynamic forces can occur which may
damage or even wreck the model. Please: take care
when using this function!
The procedure for setting up Snap-Flap:
a. Checking / changing the switch
The Ele -Tr input is switched using the mixer
switch Mix-1 (logical switch). Switch G with the
ON position “back” (G#) can be prepared as the
physical switch in assignment list 2 GLIDER.
- Main menu: ¡Setup
- Menu: Assignment, Switches
Mix-1 G> #*
In this menu you can also change the switch or
the switch position for Snap-Flap “ON”:
- Open the menu point with ENTER
- Confirm the warning message with ENTER
- Operate the desired switch repeatedly
- Move the switch to the position for ON
- Close the menu point again with ENTER.
!
If you are using a three-position switch, only the
two end-points can be set as the ON position.
b. Setting the control surface travels
- Main menu: £Mixer
- Menu: AILERON+
- Menu point: Ele -Tr
- Open the menu point with ENTER
- Move switch G to the ON position
(* must be displayed)
£Mixer.AILERON+
¨Exit
š trv' trv#
Aileron —---- 100% *
Spoiler — OFF -65% *
Flap — 18% 18% *
Ele -Tr— 15% OFF G*
Set a test value of 15% control surface travel, then
check with the elevator stick (back-stick) that the
ailerons move down.
If so: hold the elevator stick in that position, and
set the desired travel.
If not: press the REV/CLR button to change the
value to -15%. Now hold the stick in position and
set the desired travel.
Press ENTER to switch to the second parameter,
and repeat the procedure with “down-elevator”,
and the up-travel of the ailerons.
Note: The prefixes for the first and second pa-
rameters must be the same!
Ele —Tr — 15% 18%G*
12.9. V-tail models
12.9.1. Assigning V-tail servos
In the Servo Assignment menu you must change the
tail servos ELEVATR+ and Rudder to V-TAIL+:
¤Servo.Assign
¨Exit
1 AILERON+ UNI 3P
2 V-TAIL+ UNI 3P
3 V-TAIL+ UNI 3P
4 Throttle UNI 3P
5 AILERON+ UNI 3P
ª6 FLAP+ UNI 3P
The compensating inputs for Spoiler, Flap and
Throttle can also be mixed into the V-TAIL+ mixer.
12.9.2. Activating the mixer V-TAIL+
!
When you assign the V-tail servos, you will find
that the V-tail still does not
respond to any control
commands, as the default value for all the mixer in-
puts is OFF.
For this reason you should first set both travel inputs
for Elevator to, say, 60% in the V-TAIL+ mixer:
£5x Mixer.V-TAIL+
¨Exit
š trv' trv#
Elevator— 60% 60% *
Rudder — OFF OFF *
Spoiler — OFF OFF *
Flap — OFF OFF *
Thr -Tr — OFF OFF *
12.9.3. Checking / changing the direction of
servo rotation
With the travel settings you have just entered, the V-
tail servos will now respond to the elevator stick.
Apply up-elevator (back-stick) and watch the V-tail. If
either or both servos rotate in the wrong direction, re-
verse them at this point.
- Main menu: Open ¤Servo
- Menu: Select and open Calibrate
- Line: Select á
- Press ENTER to select Parameter
- Press REV/CLR to reverse the servo direction
- Move the elevator stick to check the direction of
rotation
- If all is well, press ENTER to end the procedure.
If necessary, you can now reverse the second servo
or adjust the other inputs.
ROYAL
pro
42
12.9.4. Adjusting the remaining inputs
Start with Rudder:
In V-TAIL+ set both
travel inputs for rudder to 60%.
Now check that the control surfaces move in the cor-
rect direction corresponding to Rudder commands.
If the direction of movement for right / left is incorrect,
you must reverse the prefix for both
mixer inputs for
Rudder.
This is accomplished by selecting the inputs in turn,
and pressing the REV/CLR button:
£5x Mixer.V-TAIL+
¨Exit
š2 trv' trv#
Elevator— 60% 60% *
Rudder — 60% 60% *
Spoiler — OFF OFF *
Flap — OFF OFF *
Thr -Tr — OFF OFF *
12.10. Working with flight phases
12.10.1. What is the purpose of switching be-
tween different flight phases?
Using flight phases you can adjust the characteristics
of the transmitter controls to suit the requirements of
the model for each phase of a flight (e.g. reduced
travels for SPEED tasks, extended flaps for LANDING).
All settings which can be varied separately for the
flight phases are marked in the transmitter control
menus with the code number of the flight phase.
Example Flap control:
¢Flap.NORMAL
¨Exit
Time — 0.0s
Fixed value – OFF
Pre-condition: if you wish to work with flight phases,
you must assign at least one switch (for the Main
phase, or Phases 1-3) in the menu ¡, ASSIGNMENT,
SWITCHES. If this is not the case, the transmitter al-
ways remains in Phase 1.
Note: only transmitter control settings can be al-
tered
Settings which are flight phase specific can only be
entered in relation to the transmitter controls. The
servo settings remain the same for all flight phases.
12.10.2. Default settings in the menu Flight phase
Press button I: this opens the main menu Memory.
Now use the 3-D digi-adjuster to select the Flight
phase menu, and open it by pressing the 3-D digi-
adjuster.
A typical Flight phase menu looks like this:
¦Flight phase
¨Exit
1 SPEED1 X ---
2 NORMAL ---
3 THERMAL1 ---
4 Start1 ---
Time OFF
Names have already been assigned to all four pos-
sible flight phases, although they can be altered.
The three hyphens “---” following the flight phases in-
dicate that physical switches have not yet been as-
signed to operate as flight phase switches. As a result
SPEED1 has automatically been selected as Flight
Phase 1, and marked as the active phase (X).
12.10.3. Assigning flight phase switches
You cannot use different transmitter control settings in
the various flight phases until you have assigned at
least one of the two switches:
- Main menu: Setup
- Menu: Assignment
- Menu point: Switches
- Press ENTER to open the menu point.
If you wish to use all four flight phases, you will need
to assign two switches:
a. Switch: Main phase
(assign two-position switch)
Moving this switch to the ON position (marked with
* when assigned) activates flight phase 4. The po-
sition of the second switch then has no effect.
If no switch is assigned
for Phases 1-3, the
Main phase switch can only be used to select
Phases 1 and 4.
b. Switch: Phases 1-3
(assign three-position switch)
This switch can be used to activate phases 1, 2 or
3, provided that the Main phase switch is at the
OFF position.
Main phase I> #
Phases 1-3 --- -
12.10.4. Locking / unlocking flight phases
It is possible to lock any flight phases which you have
not yet set up. Locked phases cannot be activated
even if a switch is assigned to them. If you neverthe-
less move the switch to the position corresponding to
a locked flight phase, an audible warning sounds
(beep every 0.5 seconds) for as long as the switch is
in the “wrong” position.
This is the procedure for locking / unlocking flight
phases:
- Open the main menu Memory (button I)
- Select the menu Flight phase
- Press ENTER to open the menu
(or press the 3-D digi-adjuster):
¦Flight phase
¨Exit
1 SPEED1 X ---
2 NORMAL ---
3 THERMAL1 ---
4 START1 ---
Time OFF
- Select the flight phase with the 3-D digi-adjuster,
and press ENTER to open it
(or press the 3-D digi-adjuster):
3 THERMAL1 ---
Same for all flight phases
For flight phase 2 = OFF
Manual
43
- Every time you press the REV/CLR button you
switch the flight phase between:
THERMIK1 locked, and
THERMAL1 unlocked.
- Once you have set the desired state,
press ENTER to conclude the procedure
(or press the 3-D digi-adjuster).
!
The current flight phase, which is marked with an
X, cannot be locked:
1 SPEED1 X ---
12.10.5. Copying flight phases
Once you have established the correct settings in one
flight phase, you can copy the values into another
flight phase and then modify them. This avoids the
need to re-enter all the settings from the start.
!
Only the current flight phase can be copied.
The destination (target) flight phase for the copy
process must be an unlocked flight phase.
This is the procedure for copying the current flight
phase:
- Open the main menu Memory (button I)
- Select the menu Flight phase
- Press ENTER twice to select the X
(or press the 3-D digi-adjuster twice):
¦Flight phase
¨Exit
1 SPEED1 X I>
- Now select the destination (unlocked flight phase)
using the 3-D digi-adjuster:
¦Flight phases
¨Exit
1 SPEED1 X I>
2 NORMAL ---
3 THERMAL1 c ---
4 START1 ---
Time OFF
- Confirm with ENTER
(or press the 3-D digi-adjuster).
The marker jumps back to the code number for the
current flight phase. Only the name for the “Target”
phase is retained. All flight phase specific transmitter
control settings are now the same as in the current
flight phases.
12.10.6. Changing flight phase names
You can select any of the thirteen pre-set names for
the flight phases:
1
NORMAL
6
SPEED1
11
HOVER
2
START1
7
SPEED2
12
3D
3
START2
8
CRUISE
13
ACRO
4
THERMAL1
9
LANDING
5
THERMAL2
10
AUTOROT
The only purpose of the name is to provide additional
information; it has no influence on the characteristics
of the corresponding flight phase. The crucial aspect
for the properties is always the flight phase number.
Once you have activated an input field for the name,
you can select a suitable name from those on offer:
¦Flight phase
¨Exit
1 SPEED1 X ---
2 NORMAL ---
3 THERMAL1 ---
4 START1 ---
Time OFF
12.10.7. Setting a transition time
The switch from one flight phase to another can occur
immediately, or alternatively you can set a transition
period of 1, 2 or 4 seconds (smooth transition). The
latter reduces the loads on the model and the power
system.
This is the procedure for setting a transition Time
between flight phases:
- Open the main menu Memory (button I)
- Select the menu Flight phase
- Press ENTER (or press the 3-D digi-adjuster)
to open the menu
- Select the Time line (see fig. 12.10.7.1.)
- Press ENTER (or press the 3-D digi-adjuster)
to open the set-up window
- Use the 3-D digi-adjuster to set a transition period
(see fig. 12.10.7.2.):
1sec, 2sec, 4sec or OFF
- Press ENTER (or press the 3-D digi-adjuster)
to confirm the selected setting.
¦Flight phase
¨Exit
1 NORMAL X ---
2 ACRO ---
3 START1 ---
4 LANDING ---
Time OFF
Fig. 12.10.7.1.: Time line selected
¦Flight phase
¨Exit
1 NORMAL X ---
2 ACRO ---
3 START1 ---
4 LANDING ---
Time 2sec
Fig. 12.10.7.2.: Time set to 2 sec
--------
ROYAL
pro
44
12.11. Supplementary functions
12.11.1. D/R and Expo
D/R (Dual-Rate) is available for the transmitter con-
trols Aileron, Elevator and Rudder. The function is
used to reduce the control surface travels when nec-
essary to suit the flight situation (e.g. for speed tasks).
The Travel parameter (Trvl) in the Transmitter control
menu defines the maximum travel. If D/R is switched
on, the travel is reduced by the factor entered at this
point.
Example:
80% trvl and 60% D/R result in 48% control surface
travel (60% of 80%).
Expo is available for the transmitter controls Aileron,
Elevator, Rudder and
Throttle. Negative Expo
values produce finer control around the centre posi-
tion of the stick (“softer” control of the model). Setting
positive Expo values produces “sharper” control around
the stick centre. In either case the end-travels are not
affected in any way.
The effect of Negative Expo applied to Throttle is a
smoother increase in speed at the Idle end of travel.
12.11.2. Activating Combi-Switch
“Smooth” turns can only be flown if aileron and rudder
commands are applied simultaneously; this applies to
models just as it does to full-size aeroplanes. Syn-
chronised control is not particularly easy to achieve,
especially for relative beginners. The Combi-Switch
“combi”-nes (couples) aileron and rudder, and thereby
makes it easier to fly accurate turns.
a. Open the main menu Mixer (press the Ȉ button).
b. Select and open the menu Combi-Sw:
£Combi-Sw..NORMAL
¨Exit x
Combi-Sw <N '*
Ail > Rudder – +50%
The Combi-Sw line shows which switch is assigned
to the function (N), where the ON position is
located (' = forward) and whether the function is
switched on or not (* = ON). Nothing can be
changed in this line.
c. Open the menu point Ail > Rudder (following):
£Combi-Sw..NORMAL
¨Exit
Combi-Sw <N '*
Ail > Rudder– +50%
The rate of following can be adjusted in 2% incre-
ments up to a maximum of 200%.
Values from +2% to +200% cause the rudder to fol-
low the movement of the aileron stick. If you set a
negative following rate (-2% to -200%), the rudder
stick causes the ailerons to follow its movements.
The display changes to Ail < Rudder (< or >).
The direction of following can be altered by pressing
the REV/CLR button. It changes automatically if
you alter the value beyond OFF and in the opposite
direction (opposite prefix).
Checking / changing the switch position for Combi-
Switch ON:
a. Checking the assignment
Menu: open the menu ¡Setup, Assignment,
Switches and select the line CS/DTC:
¡Assign.Switches
¨Exit
DR-ai <L #
DR-el <L #
DR-ru <L #
CS/DTC <N '*
Throttle-cut H> „
ª|Slot --- -
DTC means Direct Throttle Control and is needed for helicopters.
Switch N is assigned to Combi-Switch, and is switched
on (*). The switch position for ON is forward (').
b. Changing the switch position for ON
Move the switch to the new, desired position for
ON. Use the 3-D digi-adjuster to select the line
CS/DTC, and open the parameter with the ENTER
button (or press the 3-D digi-adjuster). Confirm the
warning message with ENTER. The arrow now
points in the new position for the switch correspon-
ding to ON (#), and you will see an asterisk after it.
Press ENTER to close the field.
12.11.3. Motor run timer
You can record the motor run time if you assign the
switch for this timer to Throttle. You can set the
switching threshold for activating the timer (Î 15.3.)
in the Transmitter control menu under TriggerPoint.
A
ssigned switch
(Î 14.3.2.)
Switch direction
and status
Following direction
Aileron = Master
Rudder = Slave
Following rate
Manual
45
13. Setting up a model helicopter
13.1. The method in principle
In our example we will set up a model memory for a
helicopter with 120° CCPM rotor head and electric
power system.
The following steps are necessary to ensure that the
model’s working systems operate correctly:
a. Set up a new model in the transmitter 13.2.
b. Prepare the transmitter controls / switches 13.3.
c. Check / change the servo assignment 13.4.
d. Check and adjust the main rotor 13.5.
e. Check and adjust the tail rotor 13.6.
Once you have completed these five steps, you will be
able to control the model’s basic functions - roll, pitch,
yaw and throttle / collective pitch.
At this point we can expand and refine the set-up:
f. Working with flight phases 13.10.
Assign switches
Unlock / lock / name flight phases
Set up transition times
Set the correct values.
13.2. Setting up a New model in the
transmitter
13.2.1. Menu I, call up New model
a. Open the main menu Memory:
Press button I.
b. Open the menu New model:
Turn the 3-D digi-adjuster to the right as far as New
model, and open the menu
(press the 3-D digi-adjuster):
¦New model
¨Exit
Memory nr. 3
Template HELIccpm
Servo conf. MPX-UNI
Mode 2: è é
Assignment HELI
OK
Note:
The definition of the model is not complete until you
confirm your selected settings with OK (Î 13.2.7.).
13.2.2. Which model memory will be used?
New models are automatically stored in the trans-
mitter’s first vacant model memory: the memory num-
ber appears in the menu. Since you have no influence
over the memory number, this line in the menu is
skipped.
If all the memories are occupied, the screen displays:
Memory nr. -1
If you nevertheless attempt to set up the new model,
the following on-screen warning appears:
No memory free
Press ENTER
13.2.3. Selecting the template
Note:
The model templates (Î 11.5.) make it much easier
and quicker to set up new models, as they already
contain the essential assignments and adjustments.
You can check which template was used to create a
particular model by accessing the menu ¦Memory,
Properties.
Turn the 3-D digi-adjuster to the right until the select
bar stands in the Template line, then press the 3-D
digi-adjuster.
Now you can select the template HELIccpm from the
eight available templates, using the 3-D digi-adjuster:
¦New model
¨Exit
Memory nr. 3
Template HELIccpm
Servo conf. MPX-UNI
Mode 4: è é
Assignment HELI
OK
Press the 3-D adjuster once more to confirm your choice.
13.2.4. Selecting the servo config(uration)
Note:
The servo configuration (Î 11.6.) defines the order in
which the servos in the model have to be connected
to the receiver. The selected configuration is only a
suggestion, and can be changed subsequently in any
way you wish if the servos are connected to different
receiver outputs (Î Menu: ¤, Assignment).
Rotate the 3-D digi-adjuster to the right until the select
bar is at the Servo conf. line, then press the 3-D
digi-adjuster.
Now use the 3-D digi-adjuster to select the MPX-UNI
configuration from those available:
¦New model
¨Exit
Memory nr. 3
Template HELIccpm
Servo conf. MPX-UNI_
Mode 4: è é
Assignment HELI
OK
Press the 3-D adjuster again to confirm your choice.
Ö 13.2.
2
..
Ö 13.2.3.
Ö 13.2.4.
Ö 13.2.5.
Ö 13.2.6
Ö 13.2.7
ROYAL
pro
46
By selecting the HELIccpm template and the servo
configuration MPX-UNI you automatically set the fol-
lowing receiver output sequence:
MPX-UNI
1 HEAD f/b
2 HEAD le
3 TAIL
4 HEAD ri
5 Throttle
6 Gyro
See also the illustration in 13.2.7. and Section 21.2.2.
The servo assignment can be changed in any way
you wish, should this prove necessary (Î 13.4.).
13.2.5. Selecting the stick Mode
The stick mode defines the association between the
stick axis and the controlled function. However, the
mode affects only the functions Roll, Pitch, Yaw and
Collective pitch. Throttle is controlled automatically
by the collective pitch stick (Î 13.8.).
First consider the functions you wish to control using
the left stick, then look up the appropriate mode in
the table below.
Mode table for the left stick:
Stick movements, left stick Required mode
forward/back left/right
Yaw (rudder)
1: è é
Pitch
(elevator)
Roll (aileron)
3: è é
Yaw (rudder)
2: é è
Collect. pitch
(and throttle)
Roll (aileron)
4: è é
The double arrows following the mode code numbers
indicate where pitch (elevator) (
è) and yaw (rudder)
(
é) are located.
The stick functions for the right stick are assigned
automatically.
Example: we will assume that you want pitch (eleva-
tor) and roll (aileron) on the left stick; in which case
you would select Mode 3. Yaw (rudder) and collective
pitch (and throttle) are now automatically on the right
stick.
Turn the 3-D digi-adjuster to the right until the select
bar is over the Mode line, then press the 3-D digi-
adjuster:
¦New model
¨Exit
Memory nr. 3
Template HELIccpm
Servo conf. MPX-UNI
Mode 3:è é
Assignment HELI
OK
You can now use the 3-D digi-adjuster to select the
stick Mode you have just decided to use.
Press the 3-D digi-adjuster to confirm your selection.
13.2.6. Selecting the Assignment
For a helicopter you would, of course, use the as-
signment list bearing the name HELI (No. 3).
Turn the 3-D digi-adjuster to the right until the select
bar is over the Assignment line, then press the 3-D
digi-adjuster:
¦New model
¨Exit
Memory nr. 3
Template HELIccpm
Servo conf. MPX-UNI
Mode 3:è é
Assignment HELI __
OK
Select HELI from the five available assignments using
the 3-D digi-adjuster.
Press the 3-D digi-adjuster to confirm your selection.
Note:
You can also change the selected assignment in any
way at any time (Menu: ¡Setup, Assignment).
13.2.7. Confirming with OK
Rotate the 3-D digi-adjuster to the right until the select
bar is at the OK line, then press the 3-D digi-adjuster.
Congratulations!
You have successfully stored a new model in the
transmitter’s memory.
If you have kept to our suggestions in the steps com-
pleted thus far, the following data is now stored in the
new model memory:
a. Receiver output sequence
Throttle
Gyro
D
i
r
e
c
t
i
o
n
o
f
f
l
i
g
h
t
TAIL
HEAD le
HEAD re
HEAD f/b
Fig. 13.2.7.1.: Servo assignment with MPX-UNI configuration
x Servos 1 to 6 are pre-defined
All servo assignments can be changed at any time
in any way (Menu: K, Assignment).
Manual
47
b. Transmitter control assignment
Roll, pitch, yaw (aileron, elevator, rudder) and collec-
tive pitch are defined by the stick mode which you se-
lected in step (Î 13.2.5.).
! Important: do not assign a throttle control!
The model helicopter’s throttle is always controlled by
the collective pitch stick, so you must not enter any-
thing under Throttle in the menu Setup, Assign-
ment, Controls.
Throttle --- -
The throttle settings are entered under Throttle in the
Transmitter control menu.
In the menu L Assignment, Controls you will find:
Function Control
Throttle --- -
Assign nothing!
Gyro E #*
Left slider for gyro gain
Collect. ‡ #
Thr.limit F #*
Transmitter controls not in use are marked in the assign-
ment list with “ --- - ”, and are not listed here.
c. Switch assignment
In the menu L Assignment, Switches you will see:
Function Switch
DR-ai <L #
DR-el <L #
DR-ru <L #
Dual-Rate
Aileron, elevator and rudder are
switched simultaneously
CS/DTC <N #
DTC = Direct Throttle Control
(and CS = Combi-Switch
for fixed-wing models)
Throttle-cut H> „
With momentary function
´ Sum F '
Aggregate timer, motor run
controlled by Control F
(throttle limiter)
Main phase I> #
Switch for main flight phase
Phases 1-3 <O '*
Flight phase switch
Switches not in use are marked in the assignment list with
“ --- - ”, and are not listed here
Tip: you can now carry out an initial check of the
working systems using the servo monitor; you don’t
need the model for this. Move to the monitor as fol-
lows:
Menu ¤Servo, Monitor:
Bar graph Percentage values
Move the sticks, sliders and switches and watch the
effects on-screen.
When you access the Monitor menu you will see the
bar graph display. Rotate the 3-D digi-adjuster to toggle
between the two types of display. Press the 3-D digi-
adjuster to leave the servo monitor.
13.2.8. Entering the model name
The model you have just stored initially bears the
name of the template you are using. In our example
this would be HELIccpm. To help you keep track of
your models, you should change this default name to
the actual model name.
This is the procedure:
a. Open the main menu ¦Memory
(press button I).
b. Select the Properties menu and open it:
¦Memory
¨Exit
Select model ....
Copy ....
Erase ....
Flight phase ....
Properties ....
ªNew model ....
(Select using the 3-D digi-adjuster, then press).
c. Use the 3-D digi-adjuster again to select the Name
line, then press ENTER (or the 3-D digi-adjuster):
¦Properties
¨Exit
Template HELIccpm
Mode 3: è é
Assignment HELI
Name Heli 600
At this point you can enter a model name with a
maximum of sixteen characters; it should clearly
identify the model. This name will also appear in
the Status display.
Text input using the keypad (Î 11.1.1.).
13.3. Preparing the controls / switches
13.3.1. Checking / changing control settings for
idle / collective pitch min. and throttle
limiter min.
a. Idle / Collective pitch min.
In the Helicopter templates Idle / collective pitch
min. is set to “back”
(# arrow following the code letter).
b. Throttle limiter
By default the minimum position for the throttle
limiter is also set to “back”.
This is the procedure for changing it to “forward”:
Move to the menu ¡Setup, Assignment (e.g.
Coll. Pitch (Collect.)), and search for the trans-
mitter control to be changed:
Collect. ‡ #*
Press ENTER to open the menu point.
This change is “global” in effect, i.e. it affects all
models which are set up to use the HELI assign-
ment list. For this reason you must confirm the
warning message by pressing ENTER.
Collect. ‡ #
Move the stick to the desired position for Idle / Col-
lective pitch min.:
Collect. ‡ '*
ROYAL
pro
48
The direction arrow indicates the current stick posi-
tion. You must press ENTER to confirm the change:
Collect. ‡ '*
Idle / Coll. pitch min. is now “forward”.
The Minimum position for Throttle limit (Thr.lim.)
can be changed using the same procedure.
13.3.2. Changing the switch ON positions and /
or the switch assignment
The position for the “ON” state can be changed for all
switches which are used in an assignment list.
Example Direct Throttle (CS/DTC):
DTC stands for Direct Throttle Control. Combi-Switch
is not used for model helicopters, so the same switch
can be used for the Direct Throttle function.
In the pre-defined HELI assignment list Direct Throttle
is active by default when switch N is at the “back” po-
sition. If you wish the ON state to be “forward”, use
this procedure:
a. Open the main menu ¡Setup (press button ¡).
b. Select (3-D digi-adjuster) and open (press the 3-D
digi-adjuster) the Assignment menu.
c. Select the sub-menu Switches (3-D digi-adjuster)
and open the setting (press the 3-D digi-adjuster).
d. Select (3-D digi-adjuster) and open (press the 3-D
digi-adjuster) the switch CS/DTC.
e. Confirm the warning message Standard list!
by pressing ENTER.
You must confirm the warning message because
any change you make at this point affects all mod-
els which are set up to use the same assignment
list (HELI).
If switch N is forward, the line in the menu must
look like this:
CS/DTC <N '*
f. Now move the switch to the desired position for Di-
rect Throttle ON. The arrow changes its direction
(' , #). The asterisk (*) is always displayed.
g. Press the 3-D digi-adjuster or ENTER to confirm:
CS/DTC <N '*
13.4. Checking / changing the servo As-
signment
Servo assignment determines the following:
x the receiver outputs to which the servos have to
be connected,
x the signal format (MPX or UNI) which the servos
require,
x the number of curve points (2, 3 or 5) required for
adjusting servo travel.
Note: defaults
In the HELIccpm template all the servos are set to the
UNI signal format by default. The rotor head servos
and the gyro “servo” have three curve points (i.e. the
centre point can also be adjusted), whereas throttle
and tail have two curve points (only the end-points
have to be adjusted).
This is the procedure:
a. Open the main menu ¤Servo (press button ¤).
b. Select (3-D digi-adjuster) and open (press the 3-D
digi-adjuster) the menu Assignment.
c. In this menu the assignment for all receiver outputs
can be changed in any way you like.
In our example we will swap over servos 3 and 4, so
that all the rotor head servos are in sequence:
d. Select (3-D digi-adjuster) and open (press the 3-D
digi-adjuster) Servo 4:
¤Servo.Assign
¨Exit
1 HEAD f/b UNI 3P
2 HEAD le UNI 3P
3 TAIL UNI 3P
4 HEAD ri UNI 3P
5 Throttle UNI 3P
ª6 Gyro UNI 3P
e. Select (3-D digi-adjuster) the TAIL function, and
move on to the signal format (press the 3-D digi-
adjuster):
4 TAIL UNI 3P
f. If the tail rotor is controlled via a gyro, you should
leave the format at UNI.
g. Switch to the number of curve points (press the
3-D digi-adjuster again):
4 TAIL UNI 2P
Set 2P: this ensures that the Centre point for the
TAIL control signal is only influenced by the set-
tings in the TAIL mixer and the yaw (rudder) trim.
h. Press the 3-D digi-adjuster or the ENTER button to
confirm. The number 4 is highlighted, and you can
now select a different servo:
4 TAIL UNI 2P
i. Select (3-D digi-adjuster) and open (press the 3-D
digi-adjuster) Servo 3.
3 TAIL UNI 3P
j. Select the HEAD ri function (3-D digi-adjuster) and
switch to Signal format (press the 3-D digi-adjuster):
3 HEAD ri UNI 3P
k. Since all three rotor head servos are always of the
same type, the signal formats must be set to the
same value.
l. Move on to the number of curve points (press the
3-D digi-adjuster again):
3 HEAD ri UNI 3P
Set 3P at this point.
Note: you can set the swashplate exactly horizon-
tal in the centre (point P3) and both end-points (points
P1 and P5) by altering the three points in the menu
Servo, Calibrate. This compensates for any me-
chanical discrepancies in the swashplate linkages.
m. Press the 3-D digi-adjuster or ENTER to confirm
your choice. The number 3 is highlighted, and you
can select a different servo:
3 HEAD ri UNI 2P
Manual
49
13.5. Checking / adjusting the main rotor
! Always secure the model before you adjust servo
direction, centre and travels, to avoid any danger or
damage if the model responds unexpectedly.
13.5.1. Checking / changing the direction of rota-
tion of the rotor head servos
It is important to check the direction of rotation of the
servos (and reverse them if necessary) before making
adjustments to the centre position and travel.
! Electric helicopters: disconnect the motor!
Set the coll. pitch stick approximately to centre.
Then switch the receiving system ON.
! Start with the collective pitch function!
If the swashplate responds correctly when you move
the collective pitch stick, and
the rotor head servos
are connected correctly (HEAD f/b, ri, le), the directions
of travel for roll and pitch must also be correct.
Checking:
Move the collective pitch stick in the direction of maxi-
mum pitch (climb): the swashplate should now move
up the rotor mast, but remain exactly horizontal.
This is the procedure for altering the direction of
rotation:
a. Open the main menu ¤Servo
(press button K).
b. Open the Calibration menu (Calibrate) and se-
lect Servo.
c. Select line á and open Parameter:
¤Calibr.HEAD f/b
¨Exit
á
0
Now you can reverse the direction of servo rotation
using the REV/CLR button. The effect of the change is
immediately visible in the graph (the curve reverses),
and can also be observed on the model.
Tip:
If you move the collective pitch stick slightly from
the neutral position before pressing the REV/CLR
button, the servo will jump to the new position
when you reverse it. This is an easy way to check
that you have selected the “right” servo.
d. When the direction of rotation is correct, press the
3-D digi-adjuster or the ENTER button to confirm
your choice, then quit the menu via Exit, and se-
lect the next servo you wish to adjust.
!
Note: please don’t start adjusting servo travels
until the directions of rotation are correct!
Please don’t start adjusting servo travels and centre
positions until you have corrected the direction of rota-
tion for all the servos. If you subsequently reverse the
servo, you will need to carry out the calibration pro-
cess all over again.
13.5.2. Calibrating servos
= setting the centre and maximum travels
In the menu ¤Servo.Calibrate (Î 11.7.) you can
adjust the travels (P1 and P5), the centre positions
(P3) and the intermediate points (P2 and P4) for all
servos in such a way that the servos take up the cor-
rect idle position, move evenly across their range of
travel, and reach the appropriate end-points.
!
If you wish your models to fly accurately, precise
servo calibration is a fundamental requirement!
!
The travel you set at this point cannot be ex-
ceeded (travel limit).
!
Always set the largest travel which the servo will
be required to carry out.
Example: when the ailerons are raised for glide path
control, the ailerons deflect up by 20 mm. For
AILERON control only 12 mm deflection is required. If
the ailerons are used as camber-changing flaps, the
required travel is just 3 mm. At the calibration stage
point P1 (and P5) must be adjusted so that the aileron
travel is 20 mm.
This is the procedure for adjusting servo centre:
a. Open the main menu ¤Servo
(press button K).
b. Open the Calibration menu (Calibrate), and se-
lect the servo.
c. Select the line P3 and open Parameter:
¤Calibr.HEAD f/b
¨Exit
á
0
P1 -100%
P2 ---
P3
0
%
P4 ---
P5 100%
!
Note: first carry out a hardware “calibration”!
Now press button F. This generates the “true” cen-
tre, without the influence of the trim or mixer inputs on
the servo.
If the servo is not in the desired centre position at this
stage, it is essential to correct the control surface po-
sition mechanically (by re-positioning the output arm
on the servo, or otherwise adjusting the linkage).
Wherever possible, the fine-tuning for Point 3 of servo
calibration should not exceed ±15%.
d. “Allocating” Centre using button F:
Now press button F. This passes the Centre value, 0%,
to all servos with the same basic function (or mixed func-
tion).
This enables you to set the centre for the current servo
regardless of the stick position.
Important: moving the stick, or pressing button F
again, erases the allocation!
ROYAL
pro
50
! Note regarding “allocation”
Allocating in this way saves you the bother of holding
the stick at one end-point, and enables you to use
both hands in order to measure the control surface
deflection on the model. If necessary you can make
corrections using the 3-D digi-adjuster.
Calibrating multiple servos with the same function
Example:
Servos 1, 2 and 4 are assigned as HEAD xxx (mixed
function). In the Calibration menu for servo 1, point P3
is opened. If you now press button F to allocate Cen-
tre, all the swashplate servos will immediately move
to centre. At this point you can use the 3-D digi-
adjuster to adjust the current servo to match the other
two.
e. Now use one of the two 3-D digi-adjusters to set
the servo to the desired centre. Any changes you
make are immediately visible on the model itself.
f. When the centre is correct, press the 3-D digi-
adjuster or the ENTER button to confirm the set-
ting, quit the menu via Exit, and select the next
servo you wish to adjust.
This is the procedure for setting maximum servo
travel (control surface deflection):
! At this point set the maximum required value for
blade deflection; this is generally the auto-rotation
value. The smaller values needed for normal flying
can be set for the individual flight phases in the menu
¢Control under Collect..
a. Open the main menu ¤Servo
(press button K).
b. Open the menu Calibration (Calibrate), and
select the servo.
c. Select line P1 and open Parameter:
¤Calibr.HEAD f/b
¨Exit
á
0
P1
-100
%
P2 ---
P3 0%
P4 ---
P5 100%
d. Allocating “maximum” using the F button:
This passes the maximum signal to all the swash-
plate servos so you can set the maximum servo
travel for the selected servo regardless of the posi-
tion of the transmitter control or trim.
Important: moving the stick, or pressing button
F again, erases the allocation!
! Note: maximum servo travel = ±110%
If necessary, servo travel can be increased to 110% on
both sides of centre.
e. Conclude the calibration for P1
(press the 3-D digi-adjuster or the ENTER button).
f. Repeat the procedure for point P5, starting with
Step c.
g. Quit the menu via ¨Exit and set up the other
servos accordingly.
13.6. Checking / adjusting the tail rotor
13.6.1. Checking / changing the direction of rota-
tion of the tail rotor servo
Before you adjust Centre and Travel it is important to
check the direction of rotation of the servo, and re-
verse it if necessary.
TIP: when entering the basic settings connect the
tail rotor servo directly to the receiver output socket for
TAIL (servo 3, if you have not changed the default as-
signment). This ensures that the gyro has no effect on
your settings.
Checking:
Set the tail rotor blades vertical relative to the tail ro-
tor. Move the yaw stick to the left, and observe the re-
sponse of the tail rotor.
13.6.1.1.: Direction of movement of the tail rotor blades
when a “left yaw” command is given
Watch the tail rotor blade whose rounded side is facing
forward: the trailing edge of this rotor blade must
move left when you apply a “left yaw” command. This
would push the tail to the right, causing the helicopter’s
nose to turn to the left.
13.6.2. The TAIL mixer
The ROYAL
pro
’s TAIL mixer conceals the function
“static tail rotor compensation”, which is also some-
times known as REVO-MIX (revolution mixer). The
TAIL mixer always appears automatically in the main
menu Mixer when you set up a model based on the
model templates HELImech or HELIccpm.
When a helicopter makes the transition from the hover
into a climb or descent, the torque which the tail rotor
has to compensate becomes larger or smaller, with
the result that the helicopter yaws in one direction.
Once set up correctly, the TAIL mixer compensates
for these torque fluctuations, and prevents the model
yawing. It also eases the task of the gyro system, so
that you can set higher gyro gain and thereby obtain
very good tail rotor stabilisation. Four parameters are
required for this:
Manual
51
Coll.(pitch)+, Coll.(pitch)-, Offset, Zero point
13.6.3. Basic Offset value
To compensate for the torque at 0° collective pitch
(main rotor), a small tail rotor pitch angle (= Offset)
is required; the value can be set separately in each
flight phase. This will be necessary if you set different
system rotational speeds in the various flight phases.
In the flight phase AUTOROT (Auto-rotation) the
Offset can be changed so that no tail rotor pitch is
present at all. This is particularly important if your
model helicopter features a driven tail rotor.
13.6.4. Collective pitch to tail (Revo-Mix)
The Collective pitch Æ tail rotor mixers are set using
the parameters Coll.+ / Coll.-, separately for climb
and descent, and for each flight phase:
Coll.+ Æ correction for climb
Coll.- Æ correction for descent
The exact values can only be established through a
programme of flight testing, as they vary according to
many parameters.
13.6.5. Mixer Zero point
The Zero point is where you set the starting point for
the static tail rotor compensation mixer. The collective
pitch Æ tail rotor mixer takes effect from this collective
pitch angle in the direction of “climb”, using the value
set under Coll.+. In the other direction (descent) the
value set under Coll.- takes effect.
Procedure:
a. Move the collective pitch stick to the position equa-
ting to 0° collective (use a rotor blade gauge if avai-
lable). Note: you should first set up the collective pitch
curve completely.
b. The Collective pitch value (Collect. / last line)
cannot be changed, as it simply shows the current
position of the collective pitch stick, and serves as
an aid when setting-up. This value is set in the
Zero point parameter.
13.6.6. Differential yaw (rudder) travel
The purpose of the Yaw (rudder) differential para-
meter (Rudd.Diff.) is to reduce the tail rotor travel in
one direction. This is necessary if the model behaves
differently when yawing (yaw commands) to left and
right (angular velocity). Since the tail rotor has to
counteract the torque generated by the main rotor,
“Yaw” is usually weaker when the model is required to
turn against the direction of the main rotor.
A separate value can be set for each flight phase.
13.7. Gyro
In the Gyro mixer the optimum gain (sensitivity) can
be set separately for each flight phase.
The Gyro menu is a dynamic menu: if the current
model does not feature a servo which is assigned to
Gyro, this function is not offered in the menu
£Mixer.
The default setting for gyro type in the model tem-
plates HELImech and HELIccpm is Heading. Gyro
gain is controlled using Slider E, and gyro suppression
is OFF (no reduction in gyro effect when yaw com-
mands are given). Servo 6 is assigned to Gyro.
Press button G to open the main menu £Mixer, then
select and open the Gyro menu:
This means that everything is already prepared for
use of a gyro in Heading mode, with gyro gain variable
via slider E.
The following table shows the basic types and charac-
teristics of commonly used gyro systems.
Heading gyro
(heading-lock gyro)
Damping gyro
(normal gyro)
The gyro brakes the rotational
movement of the model
around the axis to be stabi-
lised, and also returns the
model to its original position.
Heading or Damping can be
selected as operating modes
via the gyro gain adjustment
system.
The gyro brakes the rotational
movement of the model around
the axis to be stabilised.
Gain adjustment is variable
within the range
-100% ... +100%:
max.
Damping effect
+100%
-100%
max.
Heading effect
0% (Control)
Gain adjustment is variable
within the range
+0% ... +100%
100% (max
.
0% (OFF)
50%
!
If you set a value of 0° in line 2 of the menu, the
screen displays “Control”, and you can then vary the
gain using the transmitter control which is assigned to
the gyro (default setting: Slider E).
ROYAL
pro
52
13.7.1. Parameter Type of Gyro
The ROYAL
pro
caters for two types of gyro, and you
can select either of them.
a. Gyro type: Damping
Application:
In the case of damping (normal) gyros the gyro gain is
varied via a separate control channel.
Gyro gain is adjusted via the parameter Damping. For
each flight phase a separate % value can be set for
gyro gain. In this way the gyro can be set up very accu-
rately to match any flight task / flight phase.
b. Gyro type: Heading
Application:
In the case of Heading gyros the gain and
the be-
haviour (damping / heading) are influenced by a sepa-
rate control channel.
For each flight phase it is possible to adjust gyro gain
and the mode of operation separately, enabling you to
set up the gyro to match each flight phase accurately.
The gyro works in Heading mode if you set gyro gain
to a value in the range -1% to -100%:
Type of Gyro Heading
Heading – -65%
Suppression OFF
Fig. 13.7.1.1. Heading gyro in Heading mode
If you set gyro gain to a value within the range -1% ...
-100% (Heading mode active), the yaw trim is auto-
matically switched off. Trim changes affect a separate
heading / yaw trim memory. This trim value is used in
every flight phase which works in Heading mode, in
order to allow the pilot to carry out minor corrections
(temperature drift). The display of this trim can be
found in Status displays 1 to 3 for the Yaw stick.
!
The Parameter Trim in the menu for the transmit-
ter control Yaw continues to display only the trim, ac-
cording to the flight phase in the operational mode
Damping.
At the same time the static tail rotor compensation
mixer for the tail rotor is automatically switched off.
The gyro works in Damping mode if you set a value
for gyro gain in the range +1% and +100%:
Type of Gyro Heading
Damping – +65%
Suppression OFF
Fig. 13.7.1.2. Heading gyro in Damping mode
In Control mode gyro gain can only be varied manu-
ally using the “Gyro” transmitter control (default set-
ting: Slider E). In this case the gain must be set to 0%.
However, the screen shows the code letter of the gyro
control instead of OFF or 0%:
Type of Gyro Heading
Control – E__
Suppression OFF
Fig. 13.7.1.3. Heading gyro in Control mode
! Note: checking Heading / Damping mode
When operating a Heading gyro system in Heading
mode, you must check - before you fly the model -
that the gyro is working in the appropriate mode with
the gain value you have set:
a. Activate a flight phase in which the gain is set
within the range -1% ... -100% (Heading).
b. Move the yaw / tail rotor stick to either end-point,
then return it to the neutral (centre) position:
If the yaw / tail rotor servo immediately returns to
its starting point, the gyro is operating in Damping
mode:
You need to reverse the direction of rotation of
the Gyro channel!
13.7.2. Adjusting gyro suppression
Many gyros reduce their effect (gain) when the pilot
gives a deliberate yaw command. Without this sup-
pression the gyro would also damp out intentional yaw
movements. If you are using a gyro without its own
integral automatic suppression (read the appropriate
notes in the gyro system operating instructions!), then
you should activate this function.
The gyro effect is suppressed in proportion to the de-
flection of the “Yaw” stick.
Gyro type Heading
Damping – +75%
Suppression 100%
Fig. 13.7.2.1. Heading gyro in Damping mode
If you set Suppression to 100%, then gyro gain (sen-
sitivity) is reduced to zero (= gyro OFF) at full travel of
the “Yaw” control.
If you set Suppression to 200%, gyro gain is reduced
to zero (= gyro OFF) when the yaw stick is moved to
half its full travel.
If you set Suppression to 50%, gyro gain remains at
50% of the set value at full travel of the yaw stick.
In all flight phases, gyro suppression acts with the
same value in all gyro modes: Control, Damping,
Heading.
! Exception:
If you set gyro gain to a value within the range -1% ...
-100% (= Heading), gyro gain is not
suppressed (re-
duced).
!Caution!
Before flying a model it is vital to check that the gyro is
working properly, i.e. that it is set up to counteract any
rotational movement. If set incorrectly, the gyro will
amplify any unwanted yawing motion of the helicopter,
rendering it uncontrollable. Please read the operating
instructions supplied with the gyro system!
Manual
53
13.8. Throttle, and associated functions
The illustration below shows how throttle limiter, throt-
tle curve and the collective pitch stick affect the throt-
tle function. The individual terms are explained in Sec-
tion (Î 13.8.1.).
Since there are certain differences between electric
and I.C. (internal combustion) helicopters in this respect,
the instructions describe the settings for these two
power system types separately:
Î 13.8.2. Throttle for electric helicopters
Î 13.8.3. Throttle for I.C. helicopters
The illustration printed below shows the association
between all the settings and transmitter controls which
have a role to play in controlling the power system.
x Points P1 to P5
define the shape of the throttle curve
x Collective pitch stick controls throttle
x Throttle limiter limits throttle upwards
x Throttle min. limits throttle downwards.
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
Throttle curve for helicopter
Throttle/speed controller
Programmable
throttle curve
T
h
r
o
t
t
l
e
l
i
m
i
t
e
r
Area blocked by
throttle limiter
Collective pitch stick
Actual
throttle course
Area blocked by
throttle min.
Throttle
min
Fig. 13.8.1.: General overview “Throttle for helicopters”
This graph contains the essential information for I.C.
powered model helicopters:
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
Helicopter throttle
Throttle
Throttle curve
Idle
(Thr. min. + trim)
Thr. min.
Trim
range
(20%)
T
h
r
o
t
t
l
e
l
i
m
i
t
e
r
Fig. 13.8.2.: Overview for I.C. helicopters
Point P1 on the throttle curve is located at around
45%. From that point the throttle can be “pulled down”
to the value for Throttle Min. using the Limiter. How-
ever, the actual idle throttle setting is defined by the
sum of Throttle Min. and the set trim value. Starting
from Throttle Min., idle can be increased by up to
20%. This makes it possible to adjust the idle to suit
the current operating conditions.
13.8.1. What is the meaning of the terms Limiter,
Curve, Throttle Min., Trim, DTC and
Throttle cut?
Throttle limiter:
The throttle limiter restricts the maximum possible
throttle value. For normal flying the limiter should be
left at Maximum. All throttle values which are dictated
by the collective pitch stick in accordance with the set
throttle curve are also present at the Throttle channel.
Once the engine has been started, the throttle limiter
can be used slowly to raise the speed of the main ro-
tor “by hand”.
Throttle curve:
The throttle curve of the ROYAL
pro
has five points,
and determines how much throttle is assigned to the
various individual positions of the collective pitch stick.
The aim is a constant rotational speed, i.e. the higher
the collective pitch, the more the throttle is advanced.
Throttle Minimum and Throttle Trim (Idle):
Throttle Min. (minimum throttle) is used to set the en-
gine’s idle speed.
If you set the throttle limiter to minimum, the idle char-
acteristics of an I.C. engine can be fine-tuned using
the trim in order to suit the operating conditions (tem-
perature, humidity). Trimming is carried out by the trim
button adjacent to the stick which you have selected
(via stick Mode) to control Collective Pitch.
DTC:
DTC stands for Direct Throttle Control. If DTC is
switched on (CS/DTC switch in the ON position), the
throttle channel - regardless of whether it acts upon a
carburettor or a speed controller - is controlled directly
by the transmitter control assigned to Limiter (default
control is Slider F), and is independent of the position
of the collective pitch stick.
DTC is useful when you wish to start an I.C. engine,
or adjust the carburettor settings.
Throttle-cut:
If you hold this button pressed in, the throttle channel
is maintained in the position which you earlier se-
lected as Point P1 for the throttle servo under Servo
travel adjustment. This enables you to “switch off” an
I.C. engine, assuming that the carburettor barrel is
fully closed at this position (Î Fig.13.8.2.).
The default choice for Throttle-cut is button H on the
right-hand side of the transmitter.
! Caution: in the case of electric helicopters you
must remember that the throttle channel jumps back
to the last used throttle value when you release the
Throttle-cut button. This could cause the main rotor to
start spinning again.
ROYAL
pro
54
13.8.2. Throttle for electric helicopters
!
You must not assign Throttle in the menu
¡Setup, Assignment, Controls!
¡Assign.Controls
¨Exit
Throttle --- -
Throttle is controlled automatically by the collective
pitch control via the throttle curve.
If the throttle curve is to work properly, you must en-
sure that the following pre-conditions are fulfilled:
a. CS/DTC switch at OFF position
You will find the switch at CS/DTC in the menu
Setup, Assignment, Switches. The asterisk
must not appear after the direction arrow:
CS/DTC I> #
b. Throttle limiter at Max. position
In the menu Setup, Assignment, Controls you
will find the transmitter control which is used to
control Throttle Limit (Thr.lim.). The default is
the right-hand slider (F).
The arrow following the F points in the direction of
the Minimum position (in our example “back”):
Thr. limit F #
c. Throttle trim “fully back”
If the Idle setting for Throttle is “back”, then the trim
(trim buttons adjacent to the collective pitch stick)
must also be set fully back. Otherwise, in the worst
case - with the collective pitch stick in the Minimum
position - 20% throttle could still be generated by
the associated receiver output. That could prevent
the initialisation of an electronic speed controller,
or allow the power system to continue spinning
even when collective pitch minimum is selected.
d. Throttle Minimum at 0%
! For electric helicopters the rule is as follows:
The motor of an electric helicopter can only be
switched off completely using the Limiter or the col-
lective pitch stick if Throttle Min. is set to 0%.
For I.C. engines the rule is this:
At Throttle Min. = 0% the carburettor barrel is com-
pletely closed, and the engine stops. For this rea-
son a value for Throttle Min. must be set at which
the engine continues to run reliably (default setting
is 20%).
The value for Throttle Min. can be found in the
main menu ¢Control under Throttle:
The full range of the throttle curve can now be ex-
ploited.
For initial experiments you can safely use the default
values from the model template (see illustration).
13.8.3. Throttle for I.C. powered helicopters
!
You must not assign anything for throttle in
the menu ¡Setup, Assignment, Controls!
¡Assign.Controls
¨Exit
Throttle --- -
Throttle is automatically controlled by the collective
pitch control via the throttle curve.
If the throttle curve is to work properly, you must en-
sure that the following pre-conditions are fulfilled:
a. Switch CS/DTC at OFF setting
You will find the switch at CS/DTC in the menu
Setup, Assignment, Switches. The asterisk after
the direction arrow must not appear:
CS/DTC I> #
b. Throttle limiter at Max. position
In the menu Setup, Assignment, Controls you
will find the transmitter control which is used to
control Throttle limit (Thr.lim.). By default this is
the right slider (F).
The arrow after F points in the direction of the
Minimum position (“back” in our example):
Thr.lim. F #
c. Throttle trim “to centre”
d. Throttle minimum to 20% (default setting)
This setting ensures that the motor continues to run at
idle when the throttle limiter is set to minimum. You
can find this value in the menu ¢Control under
Throttle.
The full range of the throttle curve can now be ex-
ploited.
For initial experiments you can safely use the default
values from the model template (see illustration).
Tip: speed governor (regulator)
Glow-powered model helicopters can be fitted with a
supplementary speed governor which automatically and
very accurately maintains a constant system rotational
speed. If you wish to fly such a model, the ROYAL
pro
offers the following special function:
Assign the function RPM to a vacant servo output (Î
menu Servo, Assignment), and connect the gover-
nor to this receiver output. The menu Control now
includes an item designated RPM. At this point you can
set a fixed value for the nominal rotational speed, and
set a different value for each flight phase. The speed
governor, i.e. the fixed value for the governor, can be
switched off at any time using a physical switch. If you
do this, the throttle servo is controlled via the throttle
curve in the usual way.
Default settings from
the model template for
HELIccpm or
HELImech
A
rea only visible
after scrolling
Throttle limiter slider F
at maximum
Default settings
from the templates
for HELIccpm or
HELImech
A
rea only visible
after scrolling
Throttle limiter slider F
at maximum
Manual
55
Before using the system please read the appropriate
notes in the operating instructions supplied with the
speed governor.
13.9. Setting the collective pitch curve
I: takes effect in the active model memory.
Range: +/-100%.
One collective pitch curve for each flight phase.
F Any of the curve points can be allocated to a 3-D
digi-adjuster for in-flight adjustments (Î20.1.).
The collective pitch curve for model helicopters is set
up in the menu ¢Control under Collec.. A sepa-
rate collective pitch curve can be set up for each flight
phase, in order to obtain the most suitable form of col-
lective pitch control for each phase of flight:
Example 1: Collective pitch curve for the
flight phase HOVER
A “shallower” collective pitch curve from the hover set-
ting (stick centre) to the minimum setting (descent)
helps to provide fine control at the hover and promote
accurate landings.
In the “climb” area (stick centre to maximum) only 70%
of possible collective pitch travel is exploited. This
also contributes to fine control at the hover:
Example 2: Collective pitch curve for the
flight phase CRUISE
Linear, symmetrical collective pitch curve for the same
collective pitch control when climbing and descending:
13.10. Working with Flight phases
13.10.1. What is the purpose of switching between
different flight phases?
Using flight phases you can adjust the characteristics
of the transmitter controls to suit the requirements of
the model for each phase of flight (e.g. reduced travels
for HOVER, maximum control travels for collective pitch
at AUTOROTATION, V-shaped throttle curve for 3-D
flying, ...).
All settings which can be varied separately for the
flight phases are marked in the transmitter control
menus with the code number of the flight phase.
Example Roll control:
¢Aileron.HOVER
¨Exit
D/R — 80%
Trvl – 75%
Expo – -50%
Pre-condition: if you wish to work with flight phases,
you must assign at least one switch (for the main
phase, or phases 1-3) in the menu ¡, Assignment,
Switches. If this is not the case, the transmitter al-
ways remains in Phase 1.
!
Note: only transmitter control settings can be
altered
Settings which are flight phase specific can only be
entered in relation to the transmitter controls. The
servo settings remain the same for all flight phases.
13.10.2. Default settings in the menu Flight phase
Press button I: this opens the main menu Memory.
Now use the 3-D digi-adjuster to select the Flight
phase menu, and open it by pressing the 3-D digi-
adjuster.
A typical Flight Phase menu looks like this:
¦Flight phase
¨Exit
1 HOVER X ---
2 CRUISE ---
3 ACRO ---
4 AUTOROT ---
Time OFF
This provides us with the following information:
Flight phases 2, 3 and 4 are blocked (names crossed
though).
Names have already been assigned to all four pos-
sible flight phases, although they can be altered.
The three hyphens “---” following the flight phases in-
dicate that physical switches have not yet been as-
signed to operate as flight phase switches.
As a result Flight Phase 1 HOVER has automatically
been selected and marked as the active phase (X).
Same for all flight phases
For flight phase 2:
Travel = 75%
Expo = -50%
ROYAL
pro
56
13.10.3. Assigning flight phase switches
You cannot use different transmitter control settings in
the various flight phases until you have assigned at
least one of the two switches:
- Main menu: Setup
- Menu: Assignment
- Menu point: Switches
- Parameter: Main phase
- Press ENTER to open the menu point
- Move switch I to the ON position
(* must appear on the screen).
If you wish to use all four flight phases, you will need
to assign two switches:
a. Switch: Main phase
(assign two-position switch)
Moving this switch to the ON position (marked with
* when assigned) activates flight phase 4.
The position of the second switch then has no effect.
If no switch is assigned
for Phases 1-3, you can
only use the Main phase switch to select Phases
1 and 4.
b. Switch: Phases 1-3
(assign three-position switch)
This switch can be used to activate phases 1, 2 or
3, provided that the Main phase switch is at the
OFF position.
Main phase I> #
Phases 1-3 G> #
13.10.4. Locking / unlocking flight phases
It is possible to lock any flight phases which you have
not yet set up. Locked phases cannot be activated
even if a switch is assigned to them. If you neverthe-
less move the switch to the position corresponding to
a locked flight phase, an audible warning sounds
(beep every 0.5 seconds) for as long as the switch is
in the “wrong” position.
This is the procedure for locking / unlocking flight
phases:
- Open the main menu Memory (button I)
- Select the menu Flight phase
- Press ENTER to open the menu
(or press the 3-D digi-adjuster)
¦Flight phase
¨Exit
1 HOVER X ---
2 CRUISE ---
3 ACRO ---
4 AUTOROT ---
Time OFF
- Select the flight phase with the 3-D digi-adjuster
- Press ENTER to open it
(or press the 3-D digi-adjuster):
3 ACRO____ ---
- Every time you press the REV/CLR button you
switch the flight phase between
ACRO____ locked, and
ACRO____ unlocked.
- Once you have set the desired state, press ENTER
to conclude the procedure
(or press the 3-D digi-adjuster).
!
The current flight phase, which is marked with an X,
cannot be locked:
1 HOVER X ---
13.10.5. Copying flight phases
Once you have established the correct settings in one
flight phase, you can copy the values into another
flight phase and then modify them. This avoids the
need to re-enter all the settings from the start.
!
Only the current flight phase can be copied.
The destination (target) flight phase for the copy
process must be an unlocked flight phase.
This is the procedure for copying the current flight
phase:
- Open the main menu Memory (button I)
- Select the menu Flight phase
- Press ENTER twice to select the X
(or press the 3-D digi-adjuster twice):
¦Flight phase
¨Exit
1 HOVER X I>
- Now select the destination (unlocked flight phase)
using the 3-D digi-adjuster:
¦Flight phases
¨Exit
1 HOVER X I>
2 CRUISE ---
3 ACRO c ---
4 AUTOROT ---
Time OFF
- Confirm with ENTER
(or press the 3-D digi-adjuster).
The marker jumps back to the code number for the
current flight phase. Only the name for the “Target”
phase is retained. All flight phase specific transmitter
control settings are now the same as in the current
flight phases.
13.10.6. Changing flight phase names
You can select any of the thirteen pre-set names for
the flight phases:
1
NORMAL
6
SPEED1
11
HOVER
2
START1
7
SPEED2
12
3D
3
START2
8
CRUISE
13
ACRO
4
THERMAL1
9
LANDING
5
THERMAL2
10
AUTOROT
The only purpose of the name is to provide additional
information; it has no influence on the characteristics
of the corresponding flight phase. The crucial aspect
for the properties is always the flight phase number.
Once you have activated an input field for the name,
you can select a suitable name from those on offer.
------
Manual
57
¦Flight phase
¨Exit
1 HOVER X ---
2 CRUISE ---
3 ACRO ---
4 AUTOROT ---
Time OFF
13.10.7. Setting a transition time
The switch from one flight phase to another can occur
immediately, or alternatively you can set a transition
period of 1, 2 or 4 seconds (smooth transition). The
latter reduces the loads on the model and the power
system.
! Exception: flight phase AUTOROT
Applies to helicopters only!!
The transition always occurs immediately
when you
switch to the AUTOROT flight phase.
If you switch to any other flight phase (i.e. flight phase
other than AUTOROT), then the transition occurs with
the set delay or immediately, according to your set-
ting.
This is the procedure for setting a transition time
between the flight phases:
- Open the main menu Memory (button I)
- Select the menu Flight phase
- Press ENTER (or press the 3-D digi-adjuster)
to open the menu
- Select the Time line (see Fig. 13.10.7.1.)
- Press ENTER (or press the 3-D digi-adjuster)
to open the set-up window
- Use the 3-D digi-adjuster to set a transition period
(see Fig. 13.10.7.2.):
1sec, 2sec, 4sec or OFF
- Press ENTER (or press the 3-D digi-adjuster)
to confirm the selected setting.
Fig. 13.10.7.1.: Fig. 13.10.7.2.:
Time line selected Time set to 2 sec
ROYAL
pro
58
REFERENCE Section
The REFERENCE SECTION is the part of the manual
where you can look up terms and find out detailed in-
formation about individual menus or parameters.
This section of the manual describes all the menus of
the ROYAL
pro
. The sequence is the same as that of
the main menus when you access them directly using
the six dedicated buttons (Chapters 14. to 19.). The
description of the menus is also arranged in the order
in which they occur when you leaf through using the
3-D digi-adjusters.
All the menus are summarised in a clear manner on
the separate overview sheet supplied in the set, so
that you can quickly find functions which you do not
need to use regularly.
14. Main menu ¡Setup
The main menu Setup is opened by pressing this but-
ton:
¡Setup
¨Exit
Transmitter ....
Mixer def. ....
Assignment ....
Training ....
User ....
The settings in these menus are “global”, i.e. they ex-
tend beyond individual model memories, or apply to
the transmitter as a whole.
14.1. Menu Transmitter
¡Transmitter
¨Exit
Sound All
Safety
Check thr. ON
Check RF ON
Battery
ª Alarm 7.10V
Capacity 2100mAh
Charge 275mAh
SlfDsCharge low
Display
Contrast 0
Trim graph 0
Note:
If the screen area is not sufficient to display all the
sub-menus, this is indicated by means of arrows (
or ) at the left-hand edge of the screen. In this case
you can access the start or end of the list by scrolling
up or down using the UP / DOWN buttons ( / ) or
one of the two 3-D digi-adjusters.
14.1.1. Parameter Sound
The software allows you to select which events are to
be accompanied by an audible beep:
Values Meaning
Battery_
Battery alarm only
Bat+Trim
Battery alarm and trim increments
B+Tr+Tim
Battery alarm, trim increments and timers
Init off
All off, except power-on melody
All _
All audible signals
14.1.2. Parameter group Safety
Parameter: Check thr.
Function Warning if throttle is not at a safe setting (Idle or
(electric) motor OFF) when you switch the trans-
mitter on or change model memories
Values
ON OFF
Default
ON
Effect Affects current model only
Parameter: Check RF
Function RF channel is displayed at power-on, and must
be confirmed before an RF signal is transmitted.
Values
ON OFF
Default
ON
Effect Affects current model only
14.1.3. Parameter group Battery
Parameter: Alarm
Function Battery alarm threshold
Values
6.70V to 7.50V (increment 0.01V)
Default
7.0V
The threshold for the battery alarm can be adjusted to
suit your own preferences and the condition of the
transmitter battery.
Tip: this setting affects the residual time, i.e. the
time between the alarm sounding and the transmitter
shutting down.
Switch the transmitter on with the aerial extended and
the RF module active (RF status LED must be flash-
ing). You do not need to operate the transmitter sticks.
Parameter: Capacity
Function Capacity of the rechargeable transmitter battery
for the purposes of battery management
Values
0mAh to 4000mAh (increment 50mAh)
Default
2100mAh
Î14.1.
Î14.2.
Î14.3.
Î14.4.
Î14.5.
Manual
59
Parameter: Charge
Function Displays the current state of charge of the bat-
tery in mAh; can be varied
Values
0mAh max. = set battery capacity
Default According to state of charge of battery
Parameter: SlfDsCharge (self-discharge)
Function Adjusts the battery management system to the
self-discharge rate of the rechargeable trans-
mitter battery in use
Values
norm. low
Default
low (for PERMABATT+ battery type)
14.1.4. Parameter group Display
Parameter: Contrast
Function Optimises screen contrast to suit the operating
conditions
Values
-8 to +8
Default
0
Parameter: Trim graph
Function Selects different methods of representing the
trim positions on screen
Values
0 to 5
Default
0
14.2. Menu Mixer def.
This menu lists all fourteen available free mixers:
¡Define mixer
¨Exit
1 ELEVATR+ ....
2 V-TAIL+ ....
3 DELTA+ ....
4 AILERON+ ....
5 FLAP+ ....
ª6 <<MIX6>> ....
13 <<MIX13>> ....
14 <<MIX14>> ....
Mixer names consisting of up to eight characters can
be entered when the mixer is set up.
Mixers 1 to 5 are pre-defined, but can be modified in
any way you like.
Our standard for mixer names:
Capital letters with “+” suffix indicate that additional
inputs can be mixed into a basic function (e.g. Eleva-
tor).
Notes:
x The mixer definitions are “global”: changes to the
mixer definition affect all models which make use
of that mixer.
x Up to five free mixers can be used for each model
(memory).
x The free mixers are only available for fixed-wing
model aircraft.
14.2.1. Defining a free mixer
Each mixer can contain up to five inputs (transmitter
controls).
The servo travel is the sum of all mixer inputs. For this
reason we use the mathematical symbol for “sum” G
as the symbol for the mixers:
¡Define mixer
¨Exit
Name ELEVATR+
1 Elevator ON š
2 Spoiler ON œ
3 Flap ON š
4 Thr -Tr ON ›-
5 -------- ---- ---
Mixer input Switch Effect
(Mixer option
Î
14.2.2.)
14.2.2. Method of working and options for the
mixer inputs
These methods of working apply to all mixer inputs:
Symbol Effect Parameter in Mixer menu
™
symmetrical
---- trv
š
asymmetrical
trv' trv#
›
single-sided
---- trv
œ
single-sided
with centre
pt1 pt2
Possible supplementary options are:
Symbol Effect Meaning
2
2 directions
Automatic change of input direction
from servo to servo
+
with Offset
Shifts the centre point of the input
-
with dead-
band
Input only works when the trans-
mitter control has passed the dead-
band
Not all combinations of effect and supplementary op-
tion make sense in practice. The available com-
binations are listed in the table below.
When you leaf through the methods of working during
the mixer definition procedure you will find the sym-
bols in the following order:
Symbol Effect Meaning Fig.
™2
symmetrical,
2 directions
c
™2+
symmetrical,
2 directions,
with Offset
™+
symmetrical,
with Offset
Shifts the centre of the servo /
servos by the Offset offs
d
™2-
symmetrical,
2 directions,
with deadband
™-
symmetrical,
with deadband
The input only takes effect when
the transmitter control has
passed the deadband dead
e
™
symmetrical
c
š
asymmetrical
f
š2
asymmetrical,
2 directions
f
Mixer name for
servo assignment
The servo is con-
trolled by these inputs
}
ROYAL
pro
60
›
single-sided
Idle position of the transmitter
control at one end-point
g
›+
single-sided,
with Offset
Shifts the end-point of the servo /
servos by the Offset offs
h
›-
single-sided,
with deadband
The input only takes effect when
the transmitter control as passed
the deadband dead
i
œ
Single-sided,
with Centre
Point1 (pt1) is the magnitude of
the input at the transmitter con-
trol’s centre point
j
c
Control
travel
Servo travel
Trv
The control surface travel is sym-
metrical, i.e. the same on both sides.
Example: ailerons
Different values for up-travel and down-travel can be
set using the Differential function.
d
e
Control
travel
Servo travel
Trv
Dead
Example: six-flap wing
Small commands move the tip ailerons only. The main
ailerons only follow when the dead-band is passed.
f
Servo travel
Trv'
Trv#
Control
travel
Servo travel
Example: elevator compensation for camber-changing
flaps
Different values can be set for positive and negative
camber settings.
g
Servo travel
Control
travel
Trv
Example: elevator compensation for spoilers
h
Servo travel
Control
travel
Offs
Trv
Offs = 0%
Offs = -50%
! The total servo travel is the sum of trv and offs.
Example: ailerons as landing aid
If ailerons are to be raised for landing, in most cases
as much up-deflection as possible is desirable. The
down-travel is small, so the working range of the
servo around the neutral position of the ailerons is dif-
ferent. An Offset is used to avoid the necessity for
travel reductions.
j
Control
travel
Servo travel
Pt2
Pt1
Example:
Non-linear throttle compensation for elevator
Less compensation (down-elevator) is required from
idle to half-throttle (
pt1) than for the range from half-
throttle to full-throttle (
pt2).
The parameter
trv defines the
travels for both
directions of
servo rotation,
starting from the
transmitter con-
trol centre.
The input alters
the direction of
rotation from ser-
vo to servo
The
offs
shifts the cen-
tre of the ser-
vo(s). The trav-
els for both di-
rections of rota-
tion are the
same (as in c)
dead. (dead-
band) defines
how far the con-
trol must be
moved before
the effect takes
force. Servo
travels for both
directions are
the same.
The travel
(
trv) can be
set to different
values for each
direction of ro-
tation of the
servo(s).
Starting from
the idle posi-
tion of the
transmitter
control, the
servo moves
only in one di-
rection.
offs defines
the starting
point (= idle
position of the
servo),
trv
defines servo
target point for
the control
end-point.
pt1 and pt2
determine the
servo positions
for the centre
and end-points
of the trans-
mitter control.
Manual
61
14.2.3. Making mixer inputs switchable
Mixer switches are used when you need to be able to
activate and turn off mixer inputs using a switch. With
clever combinations of switches for the flight phases,
it is possible to switch mixer inputs off and on in in-
dividual flight phases.
Two steps are necessary in order to use a mixer
switch:
x Assign a control element
(Menu:
Setup, Assignment, Switches
Mix-1
, Mix-2 or Mix-3).
x “Attach” the mixer input to a switch
(Menu:
Setup, Mixer def., desired mixer, desired
input).
Assigning a control element for the mixer switch:
The control element for the three mixer switches can
be any of the mechanical switches G to P, the control
switches on the throttle / spoiler / collective pitch stick,
or slider E or F.
“Attaching” a mixer input to a mixer switch:
When defining mixers in the menu
Setup, Mixer def.
you can select the switches directly or reversed (in-
verted).
The following possibilities can be selected in the
”Switches” column:
Assigned
function
The mixer input is ...
ON
... always switched on
Mx1
Mx2
Mx3
... only switched on,
if the switch is at its ON position (in the case
of three-stage switches OFF / OFF / ON)
OFF
... always switched off
Mx1N
Mx2N
Mx3N
... only switched on,
if the switch is in its OFF position (in the case
of three-stage switches ON / ON / OFF)
Special case: three-position switches:
In the menu
Setup, Assignment, Switches you can
also assign three-position switches for
Mix-1, -2 or -3.
In the centre position of the switch the following
switched functions are then available:
Mx1/2/3 Centre position equates to OFF
(effect ON / OFF / OFF).
Mx1/2/3N Centre position equates to ON
(effect OFF / ON / ON).
14.3. Menu: Assignment
If you press button L to open the main menu ¡Setup,
then select and activate
Assignment, the following
menu appears (the content of the lines
Mode, As-
signment
and Name may be different).
Example:
a. Select
Mode
Stick modes (
Mode) 1 to 4 are possible.
The double arrows stand for
é Rudder, è Elevator,
and indicate which stick is used to control those
functions:
Mode Effect
1:è é
Elevator and rudder on left stick or pitch
and yaw on left stick
2: é è
Rudder left, elevator right, or
yaw left, pitch right
3: è é
Elevator left, rudder right, or
pitch left, yaw right
4: è é
Elevator and rudder on right stick, or
pitch and yaw on right stick
Aileron is assigned automatically. The unused
stick axis is generally used for throttle or spoilers
(Î 14.3.1.).
Roll is assigned automatically. The unused
stick is always assigned to collective pitch, and si-
multaneously controls the throttle via the throttle
curve.
b.
Assignment
Assignment
s 1 to 5 are possible.
At this point you select which of the five assignments
for transmitter controls and switches is to be used
to control the model. Three pre-defined lists for
POWER, GLIDER and HELI are provided.
Note: the assignment lists are “global”, i.e. any
changes you make affect all models which are set
up using the corresponding list.
c.
Name of the assignment
At this point a “descriptive” name can be entered for
the lists; it may be up to eight characters long.
14.3.1. Sub-menu
Assign.Controls
When you select and open this sub-menu, all the
available transmitter control functions are displayed
on-screen, and you can determine which control ele-
ments are to be used to operate them.
List with all available transmitter controls and default
assignments for the lists (Î 22.1.).
Î a.
Î b.
Î c.
Î 14.3.1.
Î 14.3.2.
ROYAL
pro
62
Two- / three-position switches or push-button as
transmitter controls:
All the switches of the ROYAL
pro
can also be assigned
as transmitter controls. The control then only provides
two or three positions, i.e. proportional control is not
possible.
Examples:
Two-position switches:
Retracts, aero-tow release.
Three-position switches:
Electric motor OFF – half-throttle – full-throttle,
Flaps to neutral, launch or landing position.
If the function which you are operating with a switch
has no set-up options (e.g.
Mixture control), adjust-
ments can be carried out in the menu
Servo, Cali-
brate
(end-points and centre, or intermediate points).
! Check the idle position!
In the case of transmitter controls which only work in
one direction from the idle position (throttle, spoilers,
retracts), the idle position must also be set correctly at
the assigning stage. This is important for mixers, as
“nothing” is mixed in at the idle position. At the work-
ing position (full-throttle, spoilers / landing gear ex-
tended) the set travel input is to be mixed in.
This is the method of changing the idle position:
a. Select the desired transmitter control:
Spoiler ‡ #*
b. Press ENTER to open.
Press ENTER to confirm the warning message:
Spoiler ‡ #*
c. Move the control element to the desired idle posi-
tion: the arrow must point in the direction of the
desired idle position:
Spoiler ‡ '*
d. Confirm with ENTER:
Spoiler ‡ '*
e. Check:
The asterisk indicates that the control element is
located at the previously defined idle position.
14.3.2. Sub-menu
Assign.Switches
When you select and open the sub-menu, you will find
all available switch functions, and can determine
which control elements are to be used to operate
them.
List showing all available switches and default as-
signments for the lists (Î 22.1.).
Last menu point in the list is Extra-Switch (Î 14.3.3.).
(Proportional) transmitter controls as switches:
The proportional controls of the ROYAL
pro
:
‡ Sticks (throttle, spoiler, collective pitch)
E Left-hand slider
F Right-hand slider
can all be used as two-position switches.
Examples:
Sum timer
´ for motor run time:
Switch on with throttle
(e.g. after ¼ -throttle).
Switch glowplug on at Idle
(e.g. under 15% throttle).
Change flight phase when spoilers are extended
(landing).
The trigger point is set under
TriggerPoint in the
menu
¢Control.
! Check the ON position!
In the case of switches the ON position can be deter-
mined in this menu. This is useful for adjusting the
switch positions to your personal preferences.
This is the method for changing the ON position:
a. Select the desired switch:
CS/DTC <N #*
Example: Combi-Switch is ON when switch N is
back (towards keypad). The arrow “
<” indicates
that switch N can be found on the left-hand side of
the transmitter.
b. Open with ENTER.
Press ENTER to confirm the warning message:
CS/DTC <N #*
c. Move the switch to the desired ON position. The
arrow must point in the direction of the ON posi-
tion:
CS/DTC ‡ '*
d. Confirm with ENTER:
CS/DTC ‡ '*
e. Check:
The asterisk indicates that the switch is in the ON
position.
14.3.3. Special case
Extra Sw.
The switch which is connected to the terminal clamp
(terminals ABC) on the main circuit board is termed
the Extra-Switch (supplementary switch). This will
usually be a two-position or three-position stick switch.
The method of installing and using these switches is
described in Section (Î 20.6.5.).
If the
Extra Sw. is to be used, it must be assigned a
“logical” function in addition to the “physical” input on
the main circuit board.
! The Extra Sw. assignment always applies!
The same assignment always appears at the same
point in the five assignment lists. However, the se-
lected “logical” assignment can be used for different
transmitter control or switch functions.
Extra Sw. -> Ksw
! Important: the assignment must be selected using
the 3-D digi-adjuster!
Quick-Select (selecting by operating) is not possible in
this menu point.
Manual
63
There are four possibilities for assignment:
x --- the socket ABC is not used
x K> or <PP
enter as
K or P at the assignment stage
x Ksw enter as Ksw at the assignment stage
(our recommendation)
If you decide on
Ksw, it will immediately be clear from
the assignment lists that this means the stick switch.
14.4. Menu Training
The arrangement known as Trainer (Teacher / Pupil)
mode is the safest method for beginners to get started
in model sport. Two transmitters are inter-connected
using a special lead. An experienced modeller has
control over the model, and is able to transfer control
functions to the pupil by operating the Trainer button
(“TEACHER” button). Initially these will be individual
control functions, and later all the main control func-
tions when the “Pupil” has gained sufficient skill. If in-
dividual control functions are transferred, the Teacher
retains control over the remaining control functions. If
he releases the TEACHER button, the tutor resumes
full control of the model - typically if a dangerous
situation develops. The Teacher transmitter alone
transmits an RF signal, powers the Pupil transmitter
and carries out all the data processing. This means
that the Pupil transmitter simply needs to be switched
to Pupil mode, although this does vary according to
transmitter type. No further adjustments or program-
ming work are required. All the Teacher transmitter
needs from the Pupil transmitter are the pure stick sig-
nals.
The ROYAL
pro
can be used both as Teacher trans-
mitter and Pupil transmitter.
As Teacher transmitter the ROYAL
pro
can transfer
up to five functions to the Pupil.
For fixed-wing model aircraft these are:
Aileron, elevator, rudder, throttle, spoiler.
For model helicopters:
Roll, pitch-axis, yaw, collective pitch.
As Pupil transmitter it also generates the functions
listed above, which can then be processed by the
Teacher transmitter. If the ROYAL
pro
is in Pupil mode,
the trims, mixers and all transmitter control and servo
adjustments are switched off.
14.4.1. The ROYAL
pro
as Teacher transmitter
a. The Teacher and Pupil transmitters are interconnected
using the Trainer lead # 8 5121 plugged into the
multi-function sockets. Connect the lead the right
way round: the Pupil end of the cable is marked
“Schüler”, the Teacher end “Lehrer”.
The following can be used as the Pupil transmitter:
ROYAL
pro
, ROYALevo7 / 9 / 12, Cockpit MM,
Cockpit SX, Commander mc, EUROPA mc,
PiCOline, PROFI mc 3010 / 3030 / 4000.
Many earlier MULTIPLEX transmitters can also be
used as Pupil units. If your proposed Pupil trans-
mitter is not listed above, please ask our Customer
Service department for advice.
b. Switch the Teacher transmitter (ROYAL
pro
) on.
The Pupil transmitter is also switched on automati-
cally, as it is powered by the Teacher transmitter.
Important: the ON / OFF switch on the Pupil
transmitter must be left in the OFF position.
c. Move to the sub-menu
Setup, Training.
Select
Mode, and confirm with ENTER. Rotate one
of the 3-D digi-adjusters until you see the following
display:
Menu Setup, Training Menu Setup, Training
for fixed-wing models for model helicopters
The “<M” indicator means that the button on the
left-hand side (
<) of the transmitter is the Trainer
switch used to transfer control. If you operate this
switch, an asterisk appears, indicating that the Pu-
pil now has control.
d. Select:
Mode = Teach.M, if the Pupil transmitter generates
signals in the MULTIPLEX format (Neutral signal =
1.6 ms):
e.g. ROYALevo7 / 9 / 12 with “Pupil M”, Cockpit MM
with servo format set to “M”, Cockpit SX with
“SCHULM”, Commander mc, EUROPA mc,
PiCOline, PROFI mc 3010 / 3030 / 4000).
Mode = Teach.U, if the Pupil transmitter generates
signals in the UNIVERSAL format (neutral signal =
1.5 ms):
e.g. PiCO-line, ROYALevo transmitter with “Pupil U”,
COCKPIT MM with servo format set to “U” (UNI),
Cockpit SX with “SCHULU”.
e. Select the function which the Pupil is to control,
then press the ENTER button or one of the 3-D
digi-adjusters.
The cursor now moves to the channel assign-
ment input field.
f. At the Pupil transmitter move the control which is
to operate the selected control function (Quick-
Select). The corresponding channel number is dis-
played (e.g. “
K1” for aileron). Check that the control
ROYAL
pro
64
surfaces deflect in the right direction (sense). If
not, press the REV/CLR button to reverse the
function (
# or ').
Note: Quick-Select is only possible if the ROYAL
pro
is switched on as Teacher transmitter, with the RF
module active.
g. Press the ENTER button or one of the 3-D digi-
adjusters to complete the assignment process.
Ensure that the function works correctly by holding
the TEACHER button pressed in. The Pupil should
now operate the control function which has just
been transferred. Please check that the control
surface on the model deflects in the appropriate
direction!
h. Repeat Steps e. to g. until you have assigned all
the control functions which are to be transferred to
the Pupil. Now you can return to the Status dis-
play, and training operations can commence.
!
Caution when assigning the functions Throttle
or Collective
Pitch, as the motor could burst
into life during the assigning process. Injury
hazard!
Ensure that nobody could be endangered by a
motor revving up or an electric motor starting to
run, and that the model is not in a position to
cause any damage. For safety reasons the
assignment pro-cess should be carried out with
the engine stopped or the electric motor disconnected.
The correct function can also be checked using
the Servo Monitor (Î 17.3.), in which case the
model can be left switched off.
If you wish to erase an assignment, select the appropriate
control function and select
OFF using the ( / ) but-
tons or one of the 3-D digi-adjusters.
If the transmitter is switched off in “
Teach.U” or
“
Teach.M” mode, the software automatically moves to
the menu
Setup, Training when next switched on,
reminding you that the transmitter is still set to this
mode.
14.4.2. The ROYAL
pro
as Pupil transmitter
Important: when the ROYAL
pro
is operating as a
Pupil transmitter, the trims have no effect (Teacher
trims).
The following can be used as the Teacher transmitter:
ROYAL
pro
, ROYALevo7 / 9 / 12, Cockpit SX,
Commander mc, PROFI mc 3010 / 3030 / 4000.
Some earlier MULTIPLEX transmitters can also be
used as Teacher units. If your proposed Teacher
transmitter is not listed above, please ask our Cus-
tomer Service department for advice.
a. The Teacher and Pupil transmitters are intercon-
nected using the Trainer lead # 8 5121 plugged
into the multi-function sockets. Connect the lead
the right way round: the Pupil end of the cable is
marked “Schüler”, the Teacher end “Lehrer”.
b. Switch the Teacher transmitter on.
The Pupil transmitter is also switched on automa-
tically, as it is powered by the Teacher transmitter.
c. Move to the sub-menu
Training.
d. Select:
Mode = Pupil M, if the Teacher transmitter expects
signals in the MULTIPLEX format (neutral signal =
1.6 ms):
e.g. ROYALevo7 / 9 / 12 with “
Teach.M",
Commander mc, PROFI mc 3010 / 3030 / 4000.
Mode =
Pupil U, if the Teacher transmitter expects
signals in the UNIVERSAL format (neutral signal =
1.5 ms):
e.g. ROYALevo7 / 9 / 12 with “
Teach.U”.
The following display now appears:
Note:
If you switch your ROYAL
pro
off after a period of
Trainer mode operations, without setting the para-
meter
Training, Mode to OFF, for safety reasons the
transmitter will revert directly to the menu
Setup,
Training when you next switch the system on.
Before every flight in Trainer mode it is essential
to check the following points:
x Are all the control functions which the Pupil is not
permitted to control set to
OFF?
x Is the control function assignment absolutely clear?
Check that none of the Pupil’s servo channels is
assigned twice!
x Are all the control functions working in the correct di-
rection (sense)? Always check this before launching
the model.
Note:
If the Trainer lead is disconnected during a flight, all
the control functions will automatically revert to the
Teacher transmitter.
Manual
65
14.5. Menu User
14.5.1. Parameter PIN (access code)
The purpose of the
PIN (Personal Identification Num-
ber) is to protect the settings and values stored in your
transmitter. When the
PIN is active, you can view set-
tings and values, but you cannot change them.
PIN = 0000
The default
PIN provides no protection against changes
to the settings and values stored in your transmitter.
PIN = **** (four digits)
The
PIN must contain at least one digit which is not “0”.
If you enter a
PIN, the lock takes effect next time you
switch the transmitter on. You can leaf through all the
menus, but as soon as you try to change anything you
will see this on-screen message:
Entering the correct PIN unlocks the system; the code
lock will be re-activated next time you switch the
transmitter on.
! If you forget your PIN:
You can reset the
PIN to 0000 - and thereby render it
ineffective - using the PC program ROYALpro-Data-
Manager (free download from the Internet) and the PC
Interface lead # 8 5148 (USB) or # 8 5156 (serial).
14.5.2. Parameter
Language
The ROYAL
pro
contains two language sets for the
on-screen texts. The default primary language is
Eng-
lish
, which is selected as the active language.
The default second language is
Deutsch (German).
In the menu L,
User (or Benutzer) you can toggle
between these two languages using the
Language (or
Sprache) parameter.
It is also possible to install other languages in your
transmitter using the DataManager program for the
ROYAL
pro
. This is available on the Internet from our
website http://www.multiplex-rc.de under DOWNLOADS,
SOFTWARE.
The following language combinations are available:
Code Main language Second language
DE/EN
German
FR/EN
French
ES/EN
Spanish
IT/EN
English
Italian
You can find out which language pair is installed in
your transmitter by consulting Status display 4:
Fig. 14.5.2.1.: Status display 4 showing screen languages
14.5.3. Parameter Name
The default name on your transmitter is
MULTIPLEX.
At this point you can enter your own name with up to
sixteen characters. The name then appears in Status
display 1 (Example:
Max Muster):
Fig. 14.5.3.1.: Status display 1 showing owner’s name
ROYAL
pro
66
15. Main menu ¢Control
The main menu Control is opened by pressing this
button:
H
The term transmitter control refers to all those operating
elements on the transmitter which are assigned to a
control function. These include sticks, sliders and
switches.
This menu is dynamic, i.e.:
x The menu content differs for fixed-wing model air-
craft and helicopters.
x The screen only displays those transmitter controls
which are used directly to control servos or mixers.
x Controls which have no variable parameters are
not displayed
(
Tow rel., Brake, Mixture, AUX1 and AUX2).
For a simple fixed-wing model aircraft or helicopter the
main menu
Control may look like this:
Typical fixed-wing model aircraft:
¢Control
¨Exit
Aileron ....
Elevator ....
Rudder ....
Throttle ....
Spoiler ....
ªFlap ....
TriggerPoint ....
Typical model helicopter:
¢Control
¨Exit
Aileron ....
Elevator ....
Rudder ....
Collect. ....
Throttle ....
TriggerPoint ....
15.1. Menu Control
Control
Parameter Default
Aileron
Elevator
Rudder
Trim Current trim (display only)
Step Trim increment
0.5% 1.5% 2.5% 3.5%
D/R Dual-Rate
10% to 100%
Trvl Transmitter control travel setting
Flight phase specific
0% to 100%
Expo Flight phase specific
-100% 0% 100%
Throttle
TrCut Motor CUT switch,
(display only, with Status * =
active)
Trim Current trim
(display only)
Step Trim increment
0.5% 1.5% 2.5%
Mode Effect of throttle trim
HALF = from idle to half-throttle
FULL = from idle to full-throttle
Expo Expo
-100% 0% 100%
Slow Delay, only when throttle is opened
0.0s to 6.0s
Spoiler
Flap
Time Slow function
0.0s to 6.0s
Fixed value
Flight phase specific
-100% OFF 100%
L. gear
Time Slow function
0.0s to 6.0s
Tow rel.
Brake
Gyro
Mixture
AUX1
AUX2
No adjustment at the transmitter control end!
Adjustment is only possible in the menu
¤Servo, Calibrate
Direction of rotation á
Centre P3
End-points P1, P5
Curve points P2, P4
TriggerPoint
(Î 15.3.)
Manual
67
15.2. Menu Control
Control
Parameter Default
Aileron
Elevator
Rudder
Trim Current trim (display only)
Step Trim increment
0.5% 1.5% 2.5% 3.5%
D/R Dual-Rate
10% to 100%
Trvl Transmitter control travel setting
Flight phase specific
0% to 100%
Expo Flight phase specific
-100% 0% 100%
Collect.
(Collective
Pitch)
P1 to P5 5-point curve, flight phase specific
Throttle
Min. Throttle idle (I.C. engine)
0% 20% 100%
for electric 0%: recommended
P1 to P5 5-point curve, flight phase specific
Curve Switch throttle curve on / off
ON use throttle curve
OFF only a fixed value for electric
helicopters with regulated rotor
speed (Governor mode)
Limit Slow function for throttle limiter
0.0s to 6.0s
Additional
menu points
Spoiler
Flap
Speed Slow function
0.0s to 6.0s
Fixed values Flight phase specific
-100% OFF 100%
L. gear
Time Slow function
0.0s to 6.0s
Tow rel.
Brake
Gyro
Mixture
AUX1
AUX2
No adjustment at the transmitter control end!
Adjustment is only possible in the menu
¤Servo, Calibrate
Direction of rotation á
Centre P3
End-points P1, P5
Curve points P2, P4
Trigger
Point
(Î 15.3.)
15.3. Menu ¢TriggerPoint
In this menu you can set the switching thresholds for:
x the stick
symbol
‡,
(left or right stick, according to mode) and
x the two sliders E and F.
If a switching process is set up to operate with these
three transmitter controls, you can define a point
which determines when the switching is to take place:
Control
Parameter Default
‡
E
F
# ' Idle position of the transmitter
control; display only, not defined
during the assignment process:
# back, ' forward
- * Current switched state:
- OFF, * ON
Step Trigger point:
-100% 0% 100%
Example: switching a Timer at ¼ -throttle
Since the range extends from
-100% to 100%, the
switching point for ¼ -throttle must be set at
-50%.
Tip: using throttle / spoiler as switch
The sketch below clearly shows the connection bet-
ween the control position and the switching threshold.
For example, if the motor run time is to start at ¼ -
throttle, the threshold for the associated transmitter
control must be set to
-50%.
100% (max.)
0% (OFF)
50%
(½)
+100%
-100%
0%
(¾)
(¼)
15.4. Control menu screen layout
In our example we show the display for the transmitter
control
Aileron with all the available set-up parame-
ters. However, the screen may not look exactly like
this, depending on the transmitter controls you have
assigned, and the parameters associated with them:
The screen is divided into three areas:
1. Transmitter control names, active flight phase
At the top is the name of the transmitter control (in
our example
Aileron). Next to this is the name of
the active flight phase (in our example the flight
phase
NORMAL).
Control position Switching point
ROYAL
pro
68
2. Parameter list
On the left you will see a clearly arranged list of all
the parameters for the selected transmitter control,
together with their set values.
3. Graph
The graph on the right of the screen shows in
graphic form the effect of all the settings you have
selected. The curve immediately reflects any
changes you make to the settings, and also clearly
shows the behaviour of the transmitter control: the
vertical dotted line shows the current position of the
control.
In addition to the set-up parameters, the screen also
shows two more items of information:
The small, high-set hyphen following the parameter
name indicates that this value can be allocated to one
of the 3-D digi-adjusters, and can then be adjusted in
flight (Î 20.1.):
Expo — -90%
The small number (1 to 4) following the parameter
name indicates that this value may vary from flight
phase to flight phase (Î 19.4.):
Trim ˜ 2.0%
Some parameters can be allocated to a 3-D digi-
adjuster, and can also be set to different values for
each flight phase. In this case both symbols are dis-
played:
Travel – -90%
15.4.1. Parameter Trim
for controls:
for controls:
Aileron, Elevator, Rudder
Roll, Pitch, Yaw
1
Display only
One trim value for each flight phase
The digital trim position is displayed graphically in bar-
form in status displays 1 - 3. The parameter
Trim also
shows the trim setting of the transmitter control in the
appropriate flight phase as a
% value.
15.4.2. Parameter
Step (Trim increment)
for controls:
for controls:
Aileron, Elevator, Rudder,
Throttle
Roll
, Pitch, Yaw
Adjustment
range:
1.5% (= normal) / 0.5% (= fine) /
2.5% / 3.5%
The range of the digital trims of the ROYAL
pro
is ±
20 steps. The parameter
Step can be used to define
the trim change for each trim increment as a % figure.
For example, you could obtain a maximum trim range
of ±
10% with Step 0.5%, and ±30% with Step 1.5%:
!
Note:
If the associated transmitter control is not at
centre, then any alteration in the trim increment
size automatically affects the trim value (trim
setting). In this case you must adjust the trim
accordingly.
For general-purpose use an increment size of
1.5%
has proved a good compromise. However, for very
fast models with accurate control surface linkages, or
models with very large control surface travels (e.g.
fun-fly types) an increment size of
1.5% may be too
large. In this case you should set
Step to 0.5%, which
will provide very fine trim control.
15.4.3. Parameter
Mode (throttle trim)
The trim of the transmitter control
Throttle enables
the user to adjust and fine-tune the idle speed in
models with internal-combustion engines. The pa-
rameter
Mode also determines the throttle trim’s
method of working:
Mode = HALF: the trim of the Throttle control only
affects the range from idle to half-throttle.
Mode = FULL: the trim of the Throttle control affects
the full range from idle to full-throttle.
15.4.4. Parameter
D/R (Dual-Rate)
for controls:
for controls:
Aileron, Elevator, Rudder
Roll, Pitch, Yaw
Adjustment
range:
10% to 100%
Can be allocated to a 3-D digi-adjuster
(Î 20.1.)
The purpose of Dual Rates is to alter the sensitivity of
particular transmitter controls. If the Dual-Rate para-
meter for one control function (e.g.
Elevator) is set
to
50%, you can switch to finer control of the model by
operating the switch assigned to Dual-Rate, thereby
reducing the travel of the model’s control surfaces to
half. When you operate the switch assigned to Dual-
Rate, the transmitter control curve in the graph
changes accordingly:
15.4.5. Parameter
Trvl (Travel)
for controls:
for controls:
Aileron, Elevator, Rudder
Roll, Pitch, Yaw
Adjustment
range:
0% to 100%
Can be assigned to a 3-D digi-adjuster
(Î 20.1.)
One value for each flight phase
Manual
69
The parameter Trvl works in a similar way to Dual-
Rate: it provides a means of influencing (reducing) the
sensitivity of a transmitter control. The difference with
Trvl is that the influence varies from one flight phase
to the next, i.e. you can set a separate value in each
flight phase. For example, in the flight phase
NORMAL
=
100% for maximum control response, and in the
flight phase
SPEED1 = 60% for finer control at high
speed:
Note:
At any one time the screen can only display the set-up
value for the active flight phase. If you wish to change
the values for other flight phases, please remember
that you must first activate the appropriate flight phase
before you actually alter the value.
15.4.6. Parameter
Expo
for controls:
for controls:
Aileron, Elevator, Rudder
Roll, Pitch, Yaw
Adjustment
range:
-100% to +100%
Can be allocated to a 3-D digi-adjuster
(Î 20.1.)
One value for each flight phase
Expo can be used to assign an exponential charac-
teristic to a transmitter control curve. At
Expo = 0% the
transmitter control works in a linear fashion. The effect
of negative Expo values is that the transmitter control
generates small control surface travels around the
centre position, providing finer control for the pilot.
The effect of positive Expo values is that the control
surface travels are increased around the centre po-
sition. In either case the end-points of the travel are
unchanged when
Expo is used, i.e. full travel is still
available when required:
15.4.7. Parameter
Fixed Value
for controls:
Spoiler, Flap
Adjustment
range:
-100% ... OFF ...+100%
One value for each flight phase.
Can be allocated to a 3-D digi-adjuster
(Î 20.1.)
This parameter can be used to generate fixed (flight
phase specific) control surface travels which cannot
be changed by the associated transmitter control. If
Fixed value = OFF, the control surfaces are con-
trolled directly by the relevant transmitter controls.
A typical example of this is thermal and speed settings
for a four-flap model glider (e.g. F3B). For example, if
you activate the flight phase
THERMAL1, ailerons and
camber-changing flaps (Flaps) move to a different
neutral position optimised for thermal flying (e.g. fixed
value Flap Thermal =
-30%). If you set Fixed value
=
OFF in the flight phase NORMAL, and select the flight
phase
NORMAL, the neutral position of the ailerons and
camber-changing flaps in our example will be under
proportional control using the transmitter control as-
signed to Flap.
¢Flap.THERMAL
¨Exit
Time — 0.0s
Fixed value – OFF
¢Spoiler.NORMAL
¨Exit
Time — 0.0s
Fixed value – OFF
Note:
At any one time the screen can only display the set-up
value for the active flight phase. If you wish to change
the values for other flight phases, please remember
that you must first activate the appropriate flight phase
before you actually alter the value.
15.4.8. Parameter
Time
for controls:
for control:
Spoiler, Flap, L. gear
L. gear
Adjustment
range:
0.0s to 6.0s
Can be allocated to a 3-D digi-adjuster
(Î 20.1.)
The parameter Time is used to determine the period
of time over which the transmitter control runs from
one end-point to the other. This makes it possible for
a process to be carried out slowly, over a specific pe-
riod, even though it is operated by a switch.
Examples:
Extend Retracts (
L. gear) slowly, so that the process
looks true to scale.
Extend
Spoiler (airbrakes / landing flaps) slowly, to
avoid the model carrying out abrupt movements when
the spoilers are deployed.
15.4.9. Parameter
Limit
for control:
for control:
Throttle
Throttle
Adjustment
range:
0.0s to 6.0s
Can be allocated to a 3-D digi-adjuster
(Î 20.1.)
Slow function for throttle limiter: this parameter is used
to define the period over which throttle runs up to
speed.
ROYAL
pro
70
15.4.10. Parameter Collect. P1 ... P5 (Coll. pitch
curve)
for control:
Collect.
Adjustment
range:
-100% ... 0% ... +100%
for all curve points
P1 ... P5.
Curve points can be allocated to a 3-D digi-
adjuster (Î 20.1.)
Separate curve for each flight phase
The collective pitch curve for model helicopters is set
up in the menu
¢Control, Collect. For each flight
phase you can set up a separate collective pitch curve
with five curve points
P1 ... P5, in order to match col-
lective pitch to the various flight phases as accurately
as possible. The current position of the collective pitch
stick is shown in the graph in the form of a vertical
dotted line; this is intended as an aid at the set-up
stage.
Example 1: Collective pitch curve, flight phase
HOVER
“Shallower” collective pitch curve from hover collective /
stick centre to minimum collective / descent, intended
to provide finer control at the hover and when touching
down:
Example 2: Collective pitch curve flight phase
CRUISE
Linear, symmetrical collective pitch curve for constant
collective pitch control characteristics when climbing
and descending. Greater maximum collective pitch val-
ues overall, as in most cases a higher system rotational
speed is set (throttle curve), which in turn makes the
helicopter capable of a better climb performance:
Note:
At any one time the screen can only display the col-
lective pitch curve for the active flight phase. If you
wish to change the collective pitch curve for other
flight phases, please remember that you must first ac-
tivate the appropriate flight phase before you actually
alter the value.
15.4.11. Parameter
Throttle P1 ... P5 (Throttle
curve)
for control:
Throttle
Adjustment
range:
0% (= OFF) ... 100% (= full-throttle)
for all curve points
P1 ... P5.
0% (= motor OFF) ... 100%
for
Min. (= idle)
Curve points
P1 ... P5 can be allocated
to a 3-D digi-adjuster (Î 20.1.)
Separate curve for each flight phase
P1 ... P5
The throttle curve for model helicopters is set up in the
menu
¢Control, Throttle. For each of the flight
phases 1 - 3 you can set up a separate throttle curve
with five points, in order to match motor power to the
collective pitch setting of the various flight phases as
accurately as possible. The aim is to obtain a constant
system rotational speed over the full range of collective
pitch. The throttle curve can only be fine-tuned in
flight, and varies according to many parameters (mo-
tor power, carburettor settings, power characteristics,
collective pitch curve, rotor blades, …). If you change
any one parameter, you will generally need to adjust
the throttle curve again.
The current position of the collective pitch stick is
shown in the graph as a vertical dotted line; this is in-
tended as an aid at the set-up stage.
Example 1: Throttle curve, flight phase
HOVER
Simple throttle curve for the hover. The least motor
power is required for negative collective pitch (= de-
scent - in our example:
P1 = 35%). The most motor
power is required for positive collective pitch (= climb -
in our example
P5 = 85%).
Example 2: Throttle curve, flight phase
ACRO
Symmetrical V-shaped throttle curve for increased
throttle when climbing in normal and inverted flight:
Special case: throttle
Curve = OFF for electric heli-
copters with brushless motors in governor mode:
In this case a throttle curve does not need to be set up
at the transmitter. When set to governor mode, the
speed controller provides for a constant system rota-
tional speed; all it requires is a fixed pre-set value for
the requisite system speed in each flight phase. The
throttle curve can be switched off by setting the pa-
rameter
Curve = OFF in the menu ¢Control,
Throttle. In this case the values of P1 ... P5 are
automatically the same (= fixed value), regardless of
the point which you address.
Throttle curve
AUTOROT(ation):
The fourth flight phase for model helicopters is the
auto-rotation phase (
AUTOROT, auto-rotation = emer-
gency landing if engine / motor fails). This phase al-
ways has highest priority amongst the flight phases,
i.e. if you operate the switch assigned to auto-rotation,
the transmitter immediately switches to the
AUTOROT
flight phase, regardless of the position of the flight
phase switch for
Phases 1 - 3. A curve for Throttle
is not set; instead a fixed value is used, which allows
you to set a fixed throttle position (e.g. safe motor idle
Manual
71
or motor OFF in the case of an electric power sys-
tem). The auto-rotation flight phase is primarily used
for practising auto-rotation landings.
Points
P1 ... P5 cannot be set separately, i.e. chang-
ing any one value also changes all the other points.
The fixed throttle value for auto-rotation is reduced or
increased:
Note:
At any one time the screen can only display the throttle
curve for the active flight phase. If you wish to change
the throttle curve, please remember that you must first
activate the appropriate flight phase before you actu-
ally alter the value.
15.4.12. Parameter Throttle
Min. (idle, throttle
limiter)
The parameter
Min. defines the idle speed of the
power system when the throttle limiter is at minimum
or idle. If your model is powered by a glow engine, this
is the speed which is required for starting the engine
and maintaining a safe idle (approx.
20%). For electric-
powered models the setting should be
0% (= motor
OFF). This parameter applies to all flight phases, and
can be adjusted if necessary using the idle trim (trim
buttons for the collective pitch stick) (Ú).
The horizontal dotted line in the graph shows the posi-
tion of the throttle limiter in all flight phases. The throt-
tle limiter restricts the throttle setting.
Tip:
If you wish to adjust the idle (parameter
Min.), first
move the throttle limiter to the idle position. The
change in the Idle setting
Min. can then be seen di-
rectly from the horizontal dotted line which indicates
the throttle limiter:
16. Main menu £Mixer
The main menu Mixer is opened by pressing this but-
ton:
The menu is dynamic, i.e.:
x The menu content is different for fixed-wing mod-
els and model helicopters.
x Only those mixers are displayed to which at least
one servo has been assigned.
x Certain mixers are always present for fixed-wing
model aircraft and model helicopters (Î 16.1. and
16.2.).
! Gyros in fixed-wing model aircraft:
If you have assigned the gyro function to a servo, then
Gyro also appears in this menu. You will find a descrip-
tion of this function in Section (Î 16.2.2.).
16.1. Menu Mixer Fixed-wing models
Mixers which are always present:
Three mixers are always present in the
Mixer menu,
regardless of the servo assignments. You will find
them at the start of the dynamic section with the free
mixers:
£Mixer
¨Exit
Combi-Sw. ....
Ail.Diff ....
Control Mix ....
16.1.1. Combi-Sw. (Combi-Switch)
Separately variable for each flight phase, switch is de-
fined under
CS/DTC in the menu:¡Assignment,
Switches:
£Combi-Sw..NORMAL
¨Exit
Combi-Sw. <N #*
Ail < rudder– OFF
In our example the Combi-Sw. menu shows the
switch used (
<N on the left side of the transmitter), the
direction for “ON” (
# = back) and the current position
(
* = ON).
Adjustment range:
-200% OFF 200%
Ail < rudder
Default Ail. > rudder
Increment:
2%
! Flight phase specific!
ROYAL
pro
72
16.1.2. Ail.Diff. (aileron differential)
For fixed-wing models only
Adjustment
range:
Diff.: -100% ... OFF ... 100%
Prefix (+/-) reverses direction
=> reduction of aileron up-travel or
down-travel
Separate values for differential (
Diff.)
can be set for each flight phase
F
The differential value (
Diff.) can be al-
located to the 3-D digi-adjuster
(Î 20.1.)
A simple description of aileron differential:
If ailerons are set up with symmetrical travels, i.e. the
same deflections up and down, then the down-going
aileron on the outside of the turn generates more drag
than the up-going aileron on the inside of the turn.
This results in a negative turning moment (known as
adverse yaw) which tends to push the model out of
the turn. The model yaws - nose-high - as it turns.
Aileron differential reduces the adverse yaw effect by
reducing the deflection of the down-going aileron. Ai-
leron differential is only possible if a separate servo is
installed for each control surface. The effect of
100%
differential is that the ailerons only deflect in the “up”
direction (sometimes known as “split mode”).
Aileron differential is not generally required for high-
speed powered model aircraft with symmetrical wing
sections. Model gliders usually feature cambered air-
foils, and in such cases a good starting point is about
50% differential. The optimum values can only be es-
tablished through practical flight testing. The more
highly cambered the wing section, the more differen-
tial is generally needed. That is why the system allows
you to set different levels of aileron differential for
each individual flight phase.
Example:
Glider with the following flight phases:
NORMAL:
Ail.Diff. = 50%
THERMAL*:
Ail.Diff. = 65%
SPEED**:
Ail.Diff. = 40%
* The ailerons (and in some cases the camber-changing
flaps) are lowered slightly for the Thermal task:
=> Airfoil camber increased
=> Greater aileron differential required
** The ailerons (and in some cases the camber-changing
flaps) are raised slightly for the Speed task:
=> Airfoil camber reduced
=> Less aileron differential required.
Parameter
Mode:
The
Mode parameter is used to activate or disable the
Aileron Differential mixer (switch it ON or OFF).
If both ailerons are raised in order to act as a landing
aid, then
+SPOILER should be selected as the Mode.
This suppresses aileron differential when the landing
aid (transmitter control:
Spoiler) is extended. The
effect of this arrangement is that more aileron re-
sponse is available on the landing approach, since the
aileron travels are not reduced:
Parameter
Diff.:
This is the point where the differential value itself is
set. If the differential works the wrong way round (ai-
leron up-travel reduced, instead of down-travel), sim-
ply reverse the value using the REV/CLR button.
Aileron differential can be set separately for each flight
phase. To set the values, activate the appropriate flight
phase using the flight phase switch ”
Phases 1-3”
(the active flight phase is displayed in the top line, and
also by the number before the parameter) and set the
desired value for
Diff.:
16.1.3.
Controls Mix (transmitter control mixer)
! These mixers are not global, but model specific,
i.e. they can be set separately for each model.
The transmitter
Controls Mix mixes the signal from
any second control (
Source) into any other transmit-
ter control (
Target). The mixing affects all servos
which are connected to the
Target control either di-
rectly or via a free mixer:
£Controls Mix.NORMAL
¨Exit
Travel – OFF
Source --------
Target --------
Switch ON *
Symmetrical mixer.
Adjustment range:
-100% OFF 100%
Increment:
1%
! Variable for each flight phase separately!
The mixer can be switched on and off using a mixer
switch (
Mix-1 to Mix-3).
The options are as described for the free mixers under
(Î 14.2.3.):
Manual
73
ON, Mx1, Mx2, Mx3, OFF, Mx1N, Mx2N, Mx3N.
The assigned switch and the switch status are dis-
played in the list
Assignment, Switches.
16.1.4. Setting up free mixers
For fixed-wing model aircraft!
“Free mixers” are all those mixers which are defined in
the menu
Setup, Mixer def. (Î 14.2.). The mixers
(maximum fourteen) defined at that point are set up in
the Menu G
Mixer according to the requirements of
the particular model.
! Notes:
The mixers defined in the menu
Setup, Mixer def.
can only be used in fixed-wing model aircraft, i.e. not
in model helicopters.
In the interests of clarity, the menu G
Mixer only lists
those mixers which are used in the currently selected
model, i.e. which have been assigned in the menu K
Servo, Assignment (Î 17.2.):
The mixers
Combi-Sw., Ail.Diff. and Controls
Mix
are always included in the list.
The next section explains the method of setting up a
“free mixer” using the example of the mixer
AILERON+,
which is pre-defined as standard, and is used in several
model templates:
Mode of working of the input “Dynamic” heading
of the marked input
Mixer inputs Values Mixer switch
Allocation indicator status
This example shows the method of setting the mixer
AILERON+ (Æ the various aileron travels), as they might
be set up for a model glider with a four-flap wing.
What does the menu show?
The third line of this menu is a “dynamic” heading for
the parameter(s) of the marked mixer input. The in-
formation actually displayed at this point varies ac-
cording to the selected mixer input:
x On the left the screen shows the symbol for the
method of working of the mixer input (Î 14.2.2.).
x The percentages indicate the significance of the
values. The possibilities are as follows:
---- No setting
trv' Travel setting for asymmetrical inputs
trv# Travel setting for asymmetrical inputs
trv Travel setting for symmetrical inputs
offs Offset
dead. Deadband
pt
1 Curve point for control centre position
pt2 Curve point for control end-points.
The bottom five lines display the following data:
x The transmitter control which generates the mixer
input
x % values of the mixer inputs:
Range:
-100% OFF 100%
x Status of the mixer inputs:
* Mixer input active
- Mixer input not active.
In the case of switched inputs:
G* Switch G, input switched on
G- Switch G, input switched off.
The Allocation indicator shows that the % values of
the mixer input can be allocated to one of the 3-D digi-
adjusters and - once unlocked - altered in flight (Î 20.1.).
The defintions of the pre-defined mixers can be found
in the Section (Î 22.2.).
ROYAL
pro
74
16.2. Menu: Mixer Helicopters
Mixers which are always present:
The mixer
Comp. Mixer (compensation mixer) is al-
ways available for model helicopters (Î 16.2.1.).
Mixers which vary according to servo assignment:
Gyro and TAIL are always present in models based
on the
HELImech or HELIccpm templates, as the
TAIL servo and Gyro servo (for gyro gain control) are
included in the templates. However, if you remove the
Gyro and / or TAIL servos from the servo assignment,
the associated mixers also disappear from the menu.
The
Rotor head mixer appears if you have selected
HELIccpm as template, or if the HEAD f/b (front / back)
servos have been assigned to the mixer:
£Mixer
¨Exit
Comp. Mixer ....
Gyro ....
TAIL ....
Rotor head ....
16.2.1. Comp. Mixer (compensation mixer)
This menu contains three transmitter control mixers.
In each case the Source is Roll, Pitch or Yaw (
Ai-
leron
, Elevator, Rudder).
As Target (destination) you can select from Roll,
Pitch, Yaw (Aileron, Elevator, Rudder), Throttle
and Collective pitch (
Collect.):
£Comp. Mixer.HOVER
¨Exit
Aileron ™ ----> Throttle
Travel – OFF
Elevator™ ----> Throttle
Travel – OFF
Rudder š ----> Throttle
ª Travel+ – OFF
Travel- – OFF
Adjustment range for all travels:
-100% OFF 100%
! Flight phase specific
Important: Roll and Pitch (
Aileron and Elevator)
work symmetrically, and are based on a V-curve!
The mixer always works in the same direction, regard-
less of the direction of movement of the roll or pitch
stick.
Typical application: the mixer is always required to
compensate for increased energy requirement by ap-
plying more throttle, regardless of whether the roll
command is to right or left.
16.2.2.
Gyro (Gyro mixer)
The gyro mixer included in the ROYAL
pro
can be
used for both fixed-wing model aircraft and helicop-
ters, provided that the gyro features an input for gain
adjustment from the transmitter.
The gyro mixer of the ROYAL
pro
provides a means
of setting the optimum stabilisation level of any model
axis under all flying conditions, using either simple gy-
ros or modern Heading gyros. The gyro mixer of the
ROYAL
pro
can be set to suit the two gyro types
Damping and Heading:
In the case of model helicopters it is assumed that the
vertical axis (yaw / tail rotor) is stabilised using a gyro
system.
The following table lists the characteristics of the two
gyro systems in common use today:
Damping gyro
(normal gyro)
Heading gyro
(heading-lock gyro)
The gyro brakes the rotational
movement of the model
around the axis to which the
stabilisation is applied.
The gyro brakes the rotational
movement of the model around
the axis to which the stabilisa-
tion is applied, and also returns
the model to its initial heading.
The prefix to the gain setting
determines whether the gyro
works in “damping” mode or
“heading-lock” mode.
Gain setting range
0% ... 100%:
100% (ma
x
0% (OFF
50%
Gain setting range
-100% ... +100%:
Max damping
effect
+100%
-100%
Max. heading
effect
0% (OFF)
Manual
75
What does the menu show?
Type of Gyro Damping
Control – E
Suppression OFF
a. Type of Gyro
Heading
or Damping can be selected.
b. 2
nd
line gain = 0%
If
Control appears in this line, the gain is set to
0%. In this case you will see on the right of the
screen the code letter for the transmitter control
which you have assigned to the
Gyro function in
the sub-menu
Setup, Assignment, Controls
(e.g. Slider E).
c. 2
nd
line gain 0%
- for Damping gyro this means:
Adjustment range
+1% to +100%
- for Heading gyro this means:
Adjustment range
-100% to +100%
Heading
indicator from -100% to -1%
Damping
indicator from +1% to +100%.
d.
Suppression
Gyro gain can be reduced automatically when con-
trol commands are applied. In the case of model
helicopters this occurs when the Yaw stick is
moved, for fixed-wing model aircraft when the Ai-
leron stick is operated.
Adjustment range
OFF to 200%
At the
200% setting, gyro effect is reduced to
0% when the stick is only at half of full travel.
Note:
Many gyro systems feature their own suppression
function. In this case the transmitter’s gyro suppression
function should generally be disabled (
Suppression
OFF
). Please refer to the appropriate notes in the
operating instructions supplied with your gyro system.
!Caution!
Before operating the model helicopter for the first
time, do ensure that the gyro is working correctly,
and is set up to counteract any unwanted yawing
movement. If the gyro is set up incorrectly, it will
amplify the unwanted movement, and the model
will be rendered uncontrollable.
16.2.3.
TAIL (tail rotor mixer)
The ROYAL
pro
’s TAIL mixer conceals the function
“static tail rotor compensation”, which is also some-
times known as REVO-MIX (revolution mixer). The
TAIL mixer always appears automatically in the main
menu
Mixer when you set up a model based on the
model templates
HELImech or HELIccpm.
When a helicopter makes the transition from the hover
into a climb or descent, the torque which the tail rotor
has to compensate becomes larger or smaller, with
the result that the helicopter yaws in one direction.
Once set up correctly, the
TAIL mixer compensates
for these torque fluctuations, and prevents the model
yawing. It also eases the task of the gyro system, so
that you can set higher gyro gain and thereby obtain
very good tail rotor stabilisation. Four parameters are
required for this.
Coll.(pitch)+, Coll.(pitch)-, Offset, Zero point
Notes:
It is important to complete all the rotor head settings
(including collective pitch curve) before you set up the
mixer
TAIL. The throttle curve must also be adjusted
carefully before you attempt to carry out fine-tuning
with the model in the air. If you subsequently change
the throttle curve, you will normally have to correct the
settings in the
TAIL mixer.
If you are using a heading-lock gyro in heading mode,
the
TAIL mixer must not be used, and should be
switched off permanently.
Preparation:
x You must assign
TAIL in the menu ¤Servo.Assign,
otherwise the mixer
TAIL will not appear in the
menu
£Mixer.
x A two-point calibration is sufficient when setting up
TAIL. Important: take care that the servo is not
stalled (mechanically obstructed) at its end-points
(
P1, P5).
a. Basic
Offset value
To compensate for the torque at 0° collective pitch
(main rotor), a small tail rotor pitch angle (=
Offset)
is required; the value can be set separately in each
flight phase. This will be necessary if you set different
system rotational speeds in the various flight phases.
In the flight phase
AUTOROT (Auto-rotation) the Off-
set
can be changed so that no tail rotor pitch is pre-
sent at all. This is particularly important if your model
helicopter features a driven tail rotor.
b. Collective pitch to tail (Revo-Mix)
The Collective pitch Æ tail rotor mixers are set using
the parameters
Coll.+ / Coll.-, separately for climb
and descent, and for each flight phase:
Coll.+ Æ correction for climb
Coll.- Æ correction for descent
The exact values can only be established through a
programme of flight testing, as they vary according to
many parameters.
c. Mixer
Zero point
The
Zero point is where you set the starting point for
the static tail rotor compensation mixer. The collective
pitch Æ tail rotor mixer takes effect from this collective
pitch angle in the direction of “climb”, using the value
set under
Coll.+. In the other direction (descent) the
value set under
Coll.- takes effect.
Procedure:
Move the collective pitch stick to the position equating
to 0° collective (use a rotor blade gauge if available).
Note: you should first set up the collective pitch curve
completely.
ROYAL
pro
76
The Collective pitch value (Collect. / last line) can-
not be changed, as it simply shows the current posi-
tion of the collective pitch stick, and serves as an aid
when setting-up. This value is set in the
Zero point
parameter.
d. Differential yaw (rudder) travel
The purpose of the Yaw (rudder) differential para-
meter (
Rudd.Diff.) is to reduce the tail rotor travel in
one direction. This is necessary if the model behaves
differently when yawing (yaw commands) to left and
right (angular velocity). Since the tail rotor has to
counteract the torque generated by the main rotor,
“Yaw” is usually weaker when the model is required to
turn against the direction of the main rotor.
A separate value can be set for each flight phase.
16.2.4.
Rotor head (swashplate mixer)
The ROYAL
pro
features a universal swashplate mixer
(CCPM) which can be used to control all types of
swashplate fitted with three or four linkage points /
servos.
Three parameters are required to set up the mixer.
Geometry, Rotation, Lever +/-:
Note:
The main menu
Mixer is a dynamic menu, i.e. it only
displays those mixers which are used for the current
model. The mixer
Rotor head only appears if you
have selected the model template
HELIccpm.
To ensure that the swashplate moves in the required
manner, the swashplate servos must be connected to
the receiver in the correct sequence. The channel as-
signment varies according to the selected servo con-
figuration and can be viewed at any time in the menu
Servo, Assignment (Î 17.2.):
Servo Note
HEAD f/b
Front or back swashplate servo
HEAD le
Left swashplate servo
(as seen from the tail)
HEAD ri
Right swashplate servo
(as seen from the tail)
HEAD 4
Fourth swashplate servo
Parameter: Geometry
Adjustment
range:
90q ... 150q / -90q ... -150q
Default
120q
The parameter Geometry describes the angle between
the swashplate servo
HEAD f/b and the two symmet-
rically positioned servos
HEAD le and HEAD ri.
Note:
The angle must be entered with a negative prefix “
- ”
if the servo
HEAD f/b is at the front when seen from
the tail, looking forward (Example 2).
Example 1: 3-point 120q swashplate
Geometry
+120
q
Rotation
+0
q
Example 2: 4-point 90q swashplate
Geometry
-90
q
Rotation
+0
q
Parameter: Rotation
Adjustment
range:
Range
-100q ... 0q ... 100q
Default
0q
The Rotation parameter (also known as virtual swash-
plate rotation) must be used if:
a. the swashplate is positioned physically in the model
in such a way that the servo
HEAD f/b is not lo-
cated on the centreline,
b. the model (typically) tends to roll when a pitch-axis
(elevator) command is given.
Virtual rotation required in the clockwise* direction
Æ negative values for
Rotation
Virtual rotation required in the anti-clockwise* direction
Æ positive values for
Rotation
*Swashplate viewed from above
Forward
HEAD 4
90q
HEAD ri HEAD le
HEAD f/b
Forward
HEAD f/b
120q
HEAD ri
HEAD le
Manual
77
90°
140°
Flight direction
Rotation 20°
Geometry
Rotation 20°
Flight direction
Parameter: Lever +/-
Adjustment
range:
Range
-100q ... 0q ... 100q
Default
0q
The parameter Lever +/- is only required for three-
point swashplate linkages whose linkage points are
not equi-distant from the rotor shaft centreline, usually
for mechanical reasons.
The difference is set as a percentage of the radial di-
mension (rotor shaft centre Î linkage point) of the
servo
HEAD f/b to the two side-mounted servos HEAD
le
and HEAD ri. The lateral levers are set to 100%.
Example:
Distance
HEAD f/b: 40 mm
Distance
HEAD ri / le: 50 mm (= 100%)
In our example the lever for the fore-and-aft linkage
(
HEAD f/b) is 20% shorter than the levers for the two
side-mounted linkages.
Î The correct setting is:
Lever +/- -20%.
4
0
m
m
5
0
m
m
Tip:
Once you have entered the mechanical values of the
swashplate as Parameters for the
Rotor head mixer,
the next step should be to carry out a careful and thor-
ough calibration of the Head servos; this is carried out
in the menu K
Servo.Calibrate (Î 17.1.). This
step is essential if accurate swashplate control is re-
quired. The direction of servo rotation can be checked
by giving collective pitch commands from the transmit-
ter: if any servo rotates in the wrong direction, you will
need to reverse it (
REV). It can be useful to disconnect
the pushrods between the swashplate and the rotor
head for the servo calibration process, as this makes
it easier to calibrate the maximum travels (
P1, P5).
The settings for roll, pitch and collective pitch travels
are entered in the menu H
Control (Î 15.2.).
Tip: Helicopters with Heim mechanics
If you wish to fly a helicopter fitted with the HEIM me-
chanical system, please follow this procedure:
1. Select
HELIccpm as template for the new model.
2. Assign
Elevator (pitch) to an unused servo chan-
nel.
3. Set
Geometry to 90° in the mixer Rotor head..
This means that the servos
HEAD le and HEAD ri
are controlled only by the transmitter controls for
Aileron and Elevator (roll and pitch).
4. The servo
Head f/b is not required; this channel is
left unused at the receiver.
ROYAL
pro
78
17. Main menu Servo K
The main menu Servo is opened by pressing this but-
ton:
¤Servo
¨Exit
Calibrate ....
Assignment ....
Monitor ....
Test run ....
The settings in the menus Calibrate and Assign-
ment
are model-specific, i.e. they only apply to the
current model.
The menu
Monitor shows the information which is
passed on to the servos in graphic or numerical form.
17.1. Menu Calibrate
In the Calibrate menu you can adjust the travels,
centre and (if required) intermediate points for all ser-
vos in such a way that they move evenly and run to
the end-points required for your model.
Servo list, fixed-wing model Servo list, helicopter
When you open the menu Calibrate, the screen
shows a list of all the servos which can be used with
your transmitter type (7, 9 of 12 servos). You can also
use the 3-D digi-adjuster to select servos 7 to 12,
which are not immediately visible when you open the
Calibrate menu.
17.1.1. Sub-menus for individual servos
Rotate the 3-D digi-adjuster to select the servo to be
calibrated, then press the 3-D digi-adjuster to open
the Calibration sub-menu.
The sub-menus show the settings for
REV/TRM and the
two to five curve points
P1 to P5:
Example: Fixed-wing model Example: Helicopter
Aileron servo Rotor HEAD f/b servo
All changes to the parameters REV/TRM and the servo
calibration points
P1 … P5 are immediately reflected
in the diagram, making it quick and easy to check the
overall settings.
Line 1 always shows the name of the servo. Above
the diagram you will see the channel number (receiver
output) for the selected servo.
The numbers
1 … 5 below the diagram (X-axis) cor-
respond to the servo calibration points
P1 ... P5.
Parameter
REV/TRM:
The first parameter
REV/TRM has two functions:
a. Servo reverse (
REV) alters the direction of rotation
of the servo.
To reverse the servo simply select the parameter
value and press the REV/CLR button:
the curve is “reversed”
the prefix changes
(only if the value for
á is not 0%).
b. Servo trim (
TRM) shifts all points on the servo curve
in parallel.
Servo trim is used in order to compensate for dis-
crepancies from the correct neutral point of any
one control surface. This may occur, for example,
if you are using servos which do not feature ade-
quate temperature compensation, and are there-
fore subject to fluctuating neutral points.
The set trim value acts as an offset on all calibration
points
P1 to P5, and produces a parallel shift of the
curve, although the shape of the curve remains
unchanged. The effect is the same as the standard
trim procedure.
! Note:
Use
TRM only for temporary corrections!
The servo trim
TRM should only be used to correct
trim deviations which occur when you are operating
the model, and not when setting up a new model.
In the latter case it is always better to adjust the
mechanical servo linkage.
Parameter
P1 … P5:
You can solve many problems by making adjustments
to the servo calibration points (Parameter
P1 … P5).
In detail these are:
x Establishing the maximum working range of the servo:
The values (servo travels) set at this point are never
exceeded (Protection from mechanical servo stalling,
Limit).
x Setting symmetrical control surface travels.
x Matching the travels of multiple servos to each other:
This prevents individual servos placing other ser-
vos under stress when two (or more) servos are
connected to the same control surface.
x Compensating for mechanical differences in the
control surface linkage:
For example, if the individual control surfaces of a
multi-flap wing do not move exactly synchronously,
you can correct this by adjusting the intermediate
points
P2 and P4.
Careful and accurate calibration is particularly impor-
tant with servos to which a mixer has been assigned.
! Note:
First adjust the mechanical linkage as accurately
as possible, and only then fine-tune the system
using the
Calibrate menu.
K
Î17.1.
Î17.2.
Î17.3.
Î17.4.
Manual
79
Servo calibration should only be used for fine-tuning.
Careful and thorough mechanical adjustment is
strongly recommended. Never reduce the maximum
servo travels (
P1 and P5) by more than about 10 -
20%, otherwise you will forfeit servo resolution, and
any play in the servo gearbox will be amplified unnec-
essarily.
17.1.2. The procedure for calibrating a servo
a. Servos controlled by basic functions
(e.g.
Aileron, Elevator, Rudder, L. gear, ...):
First check that the servo rotates in the correct di-
rection (“sense”) relative to the control movement.
If necessary, change the direction in the Parameter
REV/TRM. If you later reverse the servo, you will
need to re-calibrate it.
b. Servos controlled by mixers
(e.g.
AILERON+, DELTA+, V-TAIL+, ...):
In the case of servos to which a mixer has been
assigned, the direction of servo rotation is initially
irrelevant, as the correct direction for the control
surface deflection can be set within the mixer itself.
c. Select a calibration point (
P1 to P5) and activate
the value (percentage figure highlighted). Now
press the digi-adjuster allocation button
<F>.
The servo (or servos, if multiple servos are con-
trolled by the same function or mixer) automatically
takes up the position corresponding to the per-
centage figure at the selected calibration point.
With one hand you can now easily and con-
veniently measure and check the control surface
deflection (ruler, calliper), while the other hand re-
mains free to change the value using the UP /
DOWN buttons Ÿ / ź or one of the two 3-D digi-
adjusters.
d. When the deflection is correct, press the digi-adjuster
allocation button
<F> again, and the servo (or ser-
vos) takes up the position corresponding to the po-
sition of the associated transmitter control.
The number of servo calibration points (min. 2, max.
5 points) varies according to the selected setting
when you initially assigned the servos (Î 17.2.).
Tip: Vertical line for orientation!
The vertical dotted line shows the current position of
the associated transmitter control, and is an aid to ori-
entation. If you activate a value using the digi-adjuster
allocation button
<F>, the vertical line jumps to the
corresponding point and remains there until you press
the allocation button again, or move the associated
transmitter control.
17.2. Menu Assignment
Like the MULTIPLEX radio control series PROFImc
3000 and 4000, the ROYAL
pro
offers the facility to
define the receiver output sequence without restric-
tion. Compared with radio control systems with a fixed
receiver output sequence, this feature offers the ad-
vantage that, for example, the signal for a second ai-
leron servo (generally present at the higher channels,
e.g. channel 5) can be transferred to any channel you
like, and this can make it possible to use a small four-
channel receiver.
Column 1: Column 2: Column 3: Column 4:
Servo No. Control or Servo signal Number of
mixer format calibration points
More information in the table relating to the menu
Servo, Assignment (Î next page).
Free assignment: defaults in the model templates
for MULTIPLEX or the standards of other makes.
All 7, 9 or 12 possible servos (according to the
transmitter type) are included in the list.
Up to five mixers can be assigned to each model,
each of them more than once.
How to carry out the assignment process:
a. Select the servo,
then press the 3-D digi-adjuster.
b. Select the function (transmitter control or mixer),
then press the 3-D digi-adjuster.
c. Select the signal format (only if required),
then press the 3-D digi-adjuster.
d. Select the number of calibration points,
then press the 3-D digi-adjuster.
The input cursor jumps back to the servo number.
This completes the assignment process for one re-
ceiver output.
How to erase an assignment:
a. Select the servo,
then press the 3-D digi-adjuster.
b. Press the button REV/CLR,
then press the 3-D digi-adjuster.
You will now see a string of hyphens in the menu
instead of the original assignment:
3 Rudder UNI 3P
4 -------- --- --
5 Aileron UNI 3P
Example: Assignment for servo 4 has been erased
ROYAL
pro
80
Menu Servo.Assign:
Column 1 2 3 4
Table for the menu Servo.Assign:
Column 1
Servo number / receiver output
ROYAL
pro
7 maximum 7 servos
ROYAL
pro
9 maximum 9 servos
ROYAL
pro
12 maximum 12 servos
The corresponding transmission mode
(PPM 6 / 7 / 8 / 9 / 10 or PPM 12) is set auto-
matically.
If M-PCM modulation is used, the information
for twelve servos is always transmitted.
Column 2
Signal source
for servo/receiver output
At this point you select the transmitter control
or mixer whose signal is to be fed to the servo.
“--------” means that the receiver output is
not in use. In this case a neutral signal is pre-
sent at the output.
Column 3
Servo signal format
You already selected the signal format (MPX /
UNI) when you set up a new model
(Î 12.2.4.).
If some of the servos / speed controllers / gyros
connected to the receiver do not use the same
signal format, at this point you can change it
for each receiver output separately (not in
M-PCM or 12-channel PPM mode).
Column 4
Servo calibration points
Here you can determine how many calibration
points are to be available in the menu
Servo.Calibrate (Î 17.1.):
2P 2 points (e.g. for Throttle, Tow rel.)
3P 3 points (e.g. for Elevator, Rudder)
5P 5 points (if you need to correct or
generate non-linear servo travel).
17.2.1. ROYAL
pro
12 only:
Special features relating to servo 11 and /
or servo 12 (PPM modulation)
The ROYAL
pro
12 automatically switches the output
signal to 12-channel MPX format as soon as you as-
sign a function to servos 11 and / or 12 (PPM modula-
tion). This format can be processed by all MULTI-
PLEX 12-channel receivers.
If you are using an older 12-channel receiver (RX 12
DS), the jumper at servo socket 12 must be removed
to ensure that the signal is decoded correctly. All re-
cent 12-channel PPM-receivers (RX-12 DS IPD, RX-
12-SYNTH DS IPD) automatically detect the 12-
channel format and switch to the correct method of
processing.
17.2.2. Non-MULTIPLEX receivers with ten
channels
Other makes of ten-channel receiver continue to use
the “standard” signal format. If such receivers are to
work properly in conjunction with the ROYAL
pro
12,
you must not assign functions to the eleventh and
twelfth servos.
17.3. Menu Monitor
The Servo Monitor acts as a substitute for a receiving
system with servos connected to it, and enables you
to detect errors and check the function / operation of
speed controllers, gyro systems, speed governors, … .
Two types of screen display are available: graphic,
with a display of output signals in bar-chart form, and
numerical, with all values stated as percentages. You
can toggle between the two displays using the UP /
DOWN buttons (Ÿ / ź); alternatively you can switch
between them using one of the two 3-D digi-adjusters:
Bar graph display Numerical display
17.4. Menu: Test run
Automatic servo operation, which can be used for test
or demonstration purposes, or as an “electronic” aid
when range-checking the system:
Servo test with rudder active Servo test halted
As soon as you select a transmitter control, the trans-
mitter generates a steady signal which moves the
servo from one end-point of the control to the other
and back. All servos which are operated by this con-
trol - either directly or via a mixer - start running.
You can halt the servo test in either of two ways:
x Press the REV/CLR button:
Control appears
x Select no transmitter control: - - - - - - -
The transit speed can be set to any value within the
range
OFF via 0.1s to 6.0s (seconds).
! Caution: Servo test using the Throttle control!
To ensure that no danger or damage occurs as a re-
sult of the motor bursting into life, use this procedure:
a. Set the transit Time to OFF.
b. Select the desired transmitter control.
c. Set the transit time to the desired value.
Manual
81
18. Main menu Timer A
The main menu Timer is opened by pressing this but-
ton:
A
The ROYAL
pro
has five timers; four of them are
found in the main menu
¥ Timer:
¥Timer
¨Exit
Model ....
|Slot ....
´Sum ....
¶Interval ....
The fifth timer records the transmitter’s operating time,
and is only displayed in Status display 4 (Î 10.6.4.).
18.1. Slot, Sum and Interval timers:
display and reset
The timers Slot, Sum and Interval are shown in
Status display 3, but only if a switch has been as-
signed to them:
In this example no switches have been assigned to the Sum
and Interval timers.
This Status display includes the direction of counting
and the assigned switch as well as the current timer
status.
How to locate Status display 3:
If one of the other Status displays is already on-
screen, you can leaf through all four Status displays
using the Ÿ or ź buttons until you arrive at the Timer
summary. If you now call up a menu, repeatedly
pressing any main menu button takes you to a Status
display. From this point on you can leaf through the
other displays.
Resetting the timers:
Press the REV/CLR button, and all the timers will be
reset to the set alarm time.
How the timers behave when they are reset:
a.
Slot timer
This timer is reset to the set alarm, and always
stops when reset. To re-start the timer the as-
signed switch must first be moved to the OFF posi-
tion, and then back to the ON position.
b.
Sum timer
This timer is reset to the set alarm time. If the as-
signed switch is at the ON position, the timer re-
starts immediately.
c.
Interval timer
This timer is reset to the set alarm time. If the as-
signed switch is at the ON position, the timer re-
starts immediately.
18.2. Menu ¥Timer, Model
for flight time per season / session
This timer is present for each model memory. It runs
constantly when the transmitter is switched on, when
the corresponding model is selected, and when an RF
signal is being transmitted (Status LED flashes).
This means that periods of adjustment or program-
ming - when the RF module is switched off - are not
counted as part of the model’s operating time.
The menu for the Timer
Model looks like this:
¥Model
¨Exit
Time 0h00m
The maximum of 1000 hours enables the timer to re-
cord a model’s operating time over the whole season,
for one day’s flying, and also for one individual flight.
18.2.1. Summary Timer
Model
Effect For active model only,
RF must be switched on, value
is stored when the transmitter
is switched off
Range 1000 h 00 m
Erase REV/CLR button in menu
Timer, Model, at Time
18.3. Menu ¥Timer, |Slot
The term “slot” refers to a time window (limited period)
which this timer can monitor.
Time slots are used in competitions such as F3B
events, when a particular flight task must be com-
pleted within a prescribed time (e.g. ten minutes). Slot
times also make sense at other types of contest or
event in order to control the progress of activities.
The special feature of this timer is that it starts the first
time you operate the assigned switch. It cannot
be
stopped again during the remainder of the slot time
(alarm).
Slot time elapsed:
If the slot time has elapsed and
the assigned switch is
still in the ON position, the timer continues to count
upward, acting like a sum timer.
Í Slot
Í Sum
Í Interval
Counting direction Assigned switch
Î18.2.
Î18.3.
Î18.4.
Î18.5.
ROYAL
pro
82
Slot time (alarm) set to 0:00:00:
If the slot time (alarm) is set to
0:00:00, the Slot
timer acts like a
Sum timer. If the assigned switch is
still at the ON position, the timer continues to count
upwards.
18.3.1. Example: monitoring the slot time
(time limit)
For our example we assume the following:
The slot time is ten minutes.
The time is to start the first time the stick is moved.
Preparing the slot timer:
a. Assigning the switch
Menu L,
Assignment, Switches, |Slot:
|Slot ‡ '
´Sum --- -
¶¶Interval --- -
In our example the Slot timer starts when the stick
is moved forward (towards full-throttle) for the first
time.
b. Setting the
Alarm (slot time, time limit)
Menu
¥Timer, |Slot, Alarm:
¥|Slot
¨Exit
Time 0:03:24
Alarm 0:10:00
Difference #0:06:36
Switch ‡ '*
Once you have selected the Alarm line, you can
select the alarm number by pressing the 3-D digi-
adjuster, and set the time by turning the adjuster.
Now press the 3-D digi-adjuster repeatedly until
Alarm is highlighted. This concludes the set-up
procedure.
Line 1:
Time
This is the period which has elapsed since the
timer started (in our example 3 min 24 sec). If you
select this field, you can reset the time to the set
alarm time by pressing the REV/CLR button.
Line 2:
Alarm = Slot time
This is where the slot time is displayed and ad-
justed (in the above example: ten minutes).
Line 3:
Difference (display only!)
At this point the time represents the difference bet-
ween time and alarm; this value also appears in
Status display 3. The arrow before the difference
in-dicates the direction of running of the timer:
' Timer counting up
# Timer counting down
Line 4:
Switch (display only!)
At this point the screen displays the switch which is
used to control the timer (
‡), and the location of
the “ON” position (
' = forward). If the switch is in
the selected ON position, the timer runs, and an
asterisk “*” appears after the arrow.
Using buttons H and M for Timer functions:
There are two methods of using the buttons “H” and
“M”. One of the two modes is activated according to
the mode of operation you set in the
Switch field at
the assignment stage:
1. Change-over (toggle) “
…”:
Press button = timer runs
Press button again = timer stops.
2. Momentary “
„”:
Press button = timer runs
Release button = timer stops.
18.3.2. Summary: Timer 1
|Slot
Effect For active model only,
the current status when the transmitter is
switched off is not
stored.
With alarm 0:00:00:
Effect as Sum timer, but without stored
value when switched off
Start at alarm
time 0:00:00
Note:
means unequal
When the assigned switch (switch / slider /
stick) is first operated
Reset REV/CLR button in menu
or in Status display 3 (Timer)
Range Variable alarm: 3:30:00 (3 h 30 min)
Time (upwards): 4:30:00
Alarm, only if alarm
time 0:00:00
From 10 sec. before elapse of alarm time
One brief beep every second (;Ò, … ),
When the alarm time is reached:
one long beep (;ÒœőŖ)
The single beep identifies the timer as Timer 1, Slot
18.4. Menu ¥Timer, ´Sum
This timer adds (sums) times. The timer runs con-
stantly as long as the assigned switch is in the ON
position.
Important: Timer status is stored
The timer status (e.g. residual motor run time) is
stored when the model memory is changed or you
switch the transmitter off.
18.4.1. Example: recording motor run time
For this example we assume the following:
The motor is controlled using switch G (throttle
switch for an electric motor).
The full-throttle switch position is forward.
Preparing the
Sum timer:
a. Assign the switch (Î 14.3.2.)
Menu L,
Assignment, Switches, ´Sum:
|Slot ‡ '
´Sum G> '
¶¶Interval --- -
b. In our example the Sum timer continues to run as
long as the switch is at full-throttle (forward).
Line
1
2
3
4
Manual
83
c. Set the Alarm
Menu
¥Timer, ´Sum, Alarm:
¥´Sum
¨Exit
Time 0:03:24
Alarm 0:10:00
Difference '0:06:36
Switch G> '*
d. Once you have selected the Alarm line, you can
select the number of the alarm by pressing the 3-D
digi-adjuster, and set it by rotating it. Now press
the 3-D digi-adjuster repeatedly until Alarm is
highlighted again. This concludes the set-up pro-
cedure.
The
Sum timer can be used in two different modes:
a. Alarm set to
0:00:00
The timer starts at zero, runs upwards, adds the time,
and is stopped and re-started using the assigned
switch.
The timer can be reset to zero by pressing the
REV/CLR button in Status display 3, or in this menu.
In this case there is no alarm.
b. Alarm not
set to = 0:00:00
The timer starts at the set alarm time, counts down,
and sounds the alarm when the selected time has
elapsed.
18.4.2. Summary Timer 2
´Sum
Effect For active model only,
the current status is stored when the
transmitter is switched off or the model
memory is changed.
With alarm = 0:00:00 counts up, other-
wise down
Start Runs as long as the assigned switch
(switch / slider / stick) is at the ON
position
Reset REV/CLR button in the menu
or in Status display 4 (Timer)
Range Variable alarm: 3:30:00 (3 h 30 min)
Time (upwards): 4:30:00
Alarm, only if alarm
time 0:00:00
From 5 min before elapse of alarm time:
one double beep (;;Ò) per minute.
After 10 sec before elapse of alarm time:
one double beep (;;Ò) per second.
When the alarm time is reached:
Long double beep (;;ÒœőŖœőŖ)
The double beep identifies the timer as Timer 2, Sum
18.5. Menu ¥Timer, ¶¶Interval
The purpose of the Interval timer is to monitor a pre-
set time once or repeatedly.
Every time you switch the transmitter on, the set inter-
val time (alarm) re-starts.
Once the set interval time has elapsed, an audible
alarm sounds; the timer then continues to count up
until it is switched off.
18.5.1. Example:
Monitoring motor run time per climb
For this example we assume the following:
The motor is to run for a maximum of one minute
per climb.
Switch G is used to start the interval timer for the
motor run time (G simultaneously controls the mo-
tor and the motor’s total run time).
Preparing the
Interval timer:
a. Assigning the switch (Î 14.3.2.)
Menu L,
Assignment, Switches, ¶¶Interval:
|Slot ‡ '
´Sum G> '
¶¶Interval G> '
b. The Interval timer is started and counts down
when switch G is at the “forward” position.
c. Setting the alarm (interval time)
Menu
¥Timer, ¶¶Interval, Alarm:
¥¶¶Interval
¨Exit
Time 0:00:00
Alarm 0:01:00
Difference #0:00:00
Switch G> '
d. Once you have selected the Alarm line, you can
select the number of the alarm by pressing the
3-D digi-adjuster, and set the value by rotating it.
Now press the 3-D digi-adjuster repeatedly until
Alarm is highlighted. This completes the set-up
procedure.
How the
Interval timer is used:
As soon as switch G is moved to “full-throttle”, the
In-
terval
timer starts from the set time.
The last 2 seconds are indicated by a brief triple-beep
(;;;Ò).
The end of the Interval time is signalled by a long
triple beep (;;;ÒœőŖœőŖœőŖ). Following this, the
transmitter emits an audible signal for a period of five
seconds. However, the interval timer then continues to
run until switch G is returned to the “back” position. In
this case the screen displays the time by which you
have exceeded the set interval (i.e. landed too late).
ROYAL
pro
84
18.5.2. Summary Timer 3 ¶¶Interval
Effect For active model only,
the current status is not
stored when the
transmitter is switched off or you change
the model memory.
With alarm = 0:00:00 behaves as Sum
timer, otherwise counts down
Start Runs as long as the assigned switch
(switch / slider / stick) is at the ON posi-
tion
Reset REV/CLR button in the menu
or in Status display 4 (Timer),
or when re-started using the associated
switch
Range 3:30:00 (3 h 30 min)
Alarm 2 sec before elapse of alarm time:
one triple beep (;;;Ò) per second.
When the alarm time is reached:
long triple-beep
(;;;ÒœőŖœőŖœőŖ),
followed for five seconds by:
audible signal
The triple beep identifies the timer as Timer 3, Interval
18.6. Total transmitter operating time
The fifth timer records the transmitter’s operating time,
and is only displayed in Status display 4 (Î 10.6.4.):
...
...
Operation time 44.8h
After a total transmitter operating time of 1000 hours
the display is automatically reset to
0.0 h.
19. Main menu Memo I
The main menu Memo is started by pressing this but-
ton:
I
This menu is used for managing model memories. It
contains the following functions:
x Setting up a new model (memory)
x Selecting, copying, erasing a model (memory)
x Unlocking and locking flight phases
x Interrogating and modifying the characteristics of
the model memory
x Modulation
Selects one of the two operating modes
FM/PPM or FM/M-PCM,
sets FAIL-SAFE in FM/M-PCM transmission mode:
¦Memory
¨Exit
Select model ....
Copy ....
Erase ....
Flight phase ....
Properties ....
ªNew model ....
Modulation ....
19.1. Selecting a model memory
In this menu you select the model memory, i.e. the
model you wish to work on.
In the main menu
Memory choose the Select model
point.
A list of all model memories is now displayed:
¦Select model
¨Exit
1 EasyStar
2 Twister x
3 Gemini
4 ---------
5 Cularis
ª6 FunJet red
Use the 3-D digi-adjuster to select the model which
you wish to fly (or set up).
Press the 3-D digi-adjuster or the ENTER button to
confirm your selection and execute the memory
switch.
Note: Throttle-Check when you change memories
(Î 14.1.2.)
If you have activated Throttle-Check (
Check Thr.) in
the menu
¡Setup, Transmitter:
Check Thr. ON
the software checks whether the throttle control is in
the Idle position when you switch to a different model
memory.
Current model
Selected target
Vacant memory
Manual
85
If so, the transmitter switches to the selected model,
and one of the four Status displays appears.
If not, you will see the warning message:
! NOTE !
THR
Move to idle
‡
throttle release
In this case you can either move the throttle control to
the Idle position, or skip the warning message by
pressing the REV/CLR button.
! Caution!
If you press a button to “unlock the throttle”, even
though the throttle control is not at the Idle position,
you run the risk of injury or damage should the motor
burst into life unexpectedly.
19.2. Copying a model memory
In the main menu ¦Memory activate the Copy point.
The first step in this menu is to select the model
memory which is to be copied.
The screen now displays a list of all model memories:
¦Copy
¨Exit
1 EasyStar
2 Twister x
3 Gemini
4 ---------
5 Cularis c
ª6 FunJet red
Selecting the source (the model to be copied):
Use the 3-D digi-adjuster or the Ÿ / ź buttons to se-
lect the model which you wish to copy. This can also
be the currently active model (marked with
x).
Confirm your selection by pressing the 3-D digi-
adjuster or the ENTER button. The model’s name is
now highlighted on the screen, and a “
c” appears at
the end of the line for “copy”.
Selecting the target memory:
Use the 3-D digi-adjuster or the Ÿ / ź buttons to shift
the selected model to the target memory. The high-
lighted model name and the “
c” also move.
Press the ENTER button or the 3-D digi-adjuster to
confirm the copy process.
a. Target memory vacant
The model data is copied into the selected target
model memory, and the model name is also adopted.
b. Target memory occupied by a model
To ensure that you do not accidentally overwrite an
existing model, this situation generates a request to
confirm the overwrite process:
Copy over existing
model?
Yes->
No->ENTER
If you now press the REV/CLR button, the existing
model data is overwritten by the copy of the selected
source memory. Pressing ENTER interrupts the copy
process.
19.3. Erasing model memories
Move to the main menu ¦Memory and activate the
point
Erase.
In this menu the first step is to select the model mem-
ory which is to be erased.
A list of all model memories is now displayed:
¦Erase
¨Exit
1 EasyStar
2 Twister x
3 Gemini
4 ---------
5 Cularis
ª6 FunJet red
Use the 3-D digi-adjuster or the Ÿ / ź buttons to se-
lect the model which you wish to erase.
Note: you cannot erase the current model
The current model (marked with x) cannot be erased.
If you wish to erase the current model, you must first
select any other model (Î 19.1.).
Now press the 3-D digi-adjuster or the ENTER button
in order to initiate the erasure process.
The screen now displays a request to confirm the erasure;
this is intended to prevent you accidentally erasing a
model:
Erase selected
model?
Yes->
No->ENTER
Pressing the REV/CLR button erases the model,
whereas pressing ENTER interrupts the process,
leaving the model data in the memory unchanged.
19.4. Managing Flight phases
Flight phases are simply settings / data sets for a
model which can be called up by operating a switch.
The data sets are optimised for particular flight tasks.
Flight phases enable you to adjust the transmitter con-
trol settings to suit the requirements of the task in
hand, e.g. reduced control travels for SPEED flying,
lowered flaps for LANDING, different collective pitch
and throttle curves for model helicopters, etc.; all this
can be carried out separately for each flight phase. All
the settings which may be changed between flight
phases are marked with the flight phase code number
1 … 4 in the transmitter control menus (Î 14.). The
ROYAL
pro
also features digital trims which are flight
phase specific, i.e. the trims can be set differently and
stored for each flight phase. This simply means that it
is possible to trim the model perfectly for each flight
phase.
The ROYAL
pro
allows you to set up four flight phases.
However, by default the assignment lists contain no
assigned flight phase select switches.
It is possible to set up a “soft” transition (
1, 2 or 4sec
(seconds)) when switching from one flight phase to
another; this avoids abrupt changes in servo position
when you select the next phase.
Current model
This model has been
selected for copying
Current model memory
Model memory selected
for erasure
ROYAL
pro
86
If you set the Time parameter to OFF , the change-
over occurs immediately.
Note:
The helicopter flight phase “Auto-rotation” is the
exception to this rule. When you operate the
AUTOROT switch, the software immediately switches
to the
AUTOROT flight phase.
The
Flight Phase menu may look like this for a
fixed-wing model (Fig. 19.4.1.) or a helicopter (Fig.
19.4.2):
Fig. 19.4.1.: Fig: 19.4.2.:
Flight phases, fixed-w. Flight phases, helicopter
Fig. 19.4.1. shows the following information:
a. The first column shows the number of the flight
phase, followed by its name.
b. Flight phases
1 and 3 and 4 are locked
(names crossed-through).
c. Flight phase
2 NORMAL is active
(
x after the name).
d. The flight phase switch is
J> on the right-hand
side.
e.
Time shows the flight phase transition time.
The same applies to the four helicopter flight phases
which are shown in Fig. 19.4.2.
19.4.1. Selecting flight phase names
You can assign to each flight phase any of the thirteen
names included in the list below:
NORMAL, START1, START2, THERMAL1, THERMAL2,
SPEED1, SPEED2, CRUISE, LANDING, AUTOROT,
HOVER, 3D, ACRO
The sole purpose of the flight phase name is to pro-
vide additional information. In terms of the properties
of the phase it is the number of the phase which is
crucial, ie. flight phases of the same name do not
necessarily have the same settings or properties.
Changing a flight phase name:
Use the Ÿ / ź buttons (or alternatively one of the two
3-D digi-adjusters) to select a flight phase, and con-
firm your choice by pressing the ENTER button or one
of the 3-D digi-adjusters.
The cursor jumps to the name input field.
You can now select a suitable name using the Ÿ / ź
buttons or one of the two 3-D digi-adjusters.
Pressing the ENTER button or pressing one of the 3-D
digi-adjusters once concludes the input process.
Note: changing the name of the active flight phase
When you have selected the active flight phase
(marked with the letter “
x”), you must press the 3-D
digi-adjuster or ENTER twice in order to conclude the
procedure.
19.4.2. Locking / unlocking flight phases
The flight phases are unlocked or locked using the
REV/CLR button. By locking a flight phase you can
avoid the danger of launching with a flight phase se-
lected which does not contain the correct settings.
If you operate a flight phase switch to select a locked
flight phase, you will hear a continuous beep to warn
you of your error. The last used flight phase remains
active, and its number is shown in Status displays
1, 2
and
3 (Î 10.6.2.). The name of the locked flight
phase which you tried to access is shown crossed out.
How to lock / unlock flight phases:
First select a flight phase, and confirm your choice by
pressing the ENTER button or one of the 3-D digi-
adjusters.
The cursor now jumps to the flight phase name. At
this point you can toggle between “free” and “loc
ked”
using the REV/CLR button.
Selecting a different name using the 3-D digi-adjuster
also unlocks a locked flight phase.
Note:
The active flight phase (marked with an
x) cannot be
locked.
19.4.3. Copying flight phases
If you wish to start using different flight phases, we
recommend the following procedure:
First fly the model using just one flight phase, leaving
the other phases locked. Test-fly and adjust the model
until you are confident that it is trimmed perfectly. At
this stage the first flight phase should be copied. Now
when you switch to the new flight phase(s) you can be
sure that the model will continue to fly in the usual
way. All you have to do at this stage is carry out the
desired changes in the additional flight phases.
The active flight phase is marked with an
x. The only
flight phase you can copy is the active one. The fol-
lowing steps are required:
a. Select the active phase (
x ) using the UP / DOWN
buttons (Ÿ / ź), or alternatively using one of the
two 3-D digi-adjusters.
b. Press the 3-D digi-adjuster (or ENTER) twice,
the cursor jumps to the
x.
c. Select the target phase to receive the copy, using
the UP / DOWN buttons (Ÿ / ź) or alternatively
one of the two 3-D digi-adjusters. A letter
c (= copy)
appears after the target phase name.
d. Press the ENTER button or one of the 3-D digi-
adjusters to conclude the copy process.
e. In the main menu
¦Memory activate the point
Flight phase:
¦Flight phase
¨Exit
1 HOVER
2 NORMAL x J>
3 THERMAL1 J>
4 START1 I>
Time OFF
Manual
87
19.4.4. Setting the flight phase transition time
In the bottom line of the menu you can set the tran-
sition time (
Time) for moving between flight phases:
OFF 1sec 2sec 4sec
! Exception: auto-rotation
Switching into the
AUTOROT flight phase always
occurs without any delay!
19.5. Checking / changing the Proper-
ties of the current model memory
Menu I Memory, Properties:
19.5.1. What is displayed?
¦Properties
¨Exit
Template GLIDER
Mode 4: èé
Assignment GLIDER
Name Cularis
Template (cannot be changed!):
If you have used an “unsuitable”
Template when
setting up a new model, you must erase the model
and create it anew.
19.5.2. What can be changed?
Stick
Modes 1 to 4 are available:
The double arrows indicate the sticks which are
used to control elevator (
è) and rudder (é)
(Î 14.3.).
Assignment:
When you set up a new model you select one list
from the five assignment lists. Your selection can
be changed subsequently in this menu
(Î 14.3.).
Model
Name:
The model name can be entered using up to six-
teen characters
(Î 11.1.1.).
19.6. Setting up a New model
Menu: I Memory, New model:
¦New model
¨Exit
Memory nr. 3
Template GLIDER
Servo conf. MPX-UNI
Mode 4: è é
Assignment GLIDER
OK
a. Memory nr.
For a new model the software uses the transmit-
ter's first available vacant memory. It is not pos-
sible to choose the memory.
If you wish to store the new model in a different
memory, you can subsequently copy the new
model into a different memory location (Î 19.2.).
If all the memories are occupied, the screen shows:
Memory nr. -1
If you still attempt to set up the new model by pres-
sing
OK, you will see the following on-screen warning:
No memory free
Press ENTER
If you see this message, please leave the menu. You
cannot store a new model until you have erased a
model which you no longer need (Î 19.3.).
b.
Template
Under
Template you determine the basic model
type which applies to the new model you wish to
set up. Your fundamental choices are Helicopter
and Fixed-wing, and each basic group contains
several model templates.
You must select one of the eight templates for
each new model. The template determines which
basic settings are adopted for the model.
The advantage of using model templates to set up
a new model is that many basic settings are al-
ready carried out for you; all you have to do is fine-
tune the values. For a detailed description of the
model templates please see Chapter (Î 21.).
c.
Servo conf.
For each make of receiver, the servo configuration
defines the sequence in which the servos must be
connected to the receiver. If you are using MULTI-
PLEX equipment,
Throttle is servo 4, Rudder is
servo
3, and so on. If you have already flown the
model using a different make of transmitter, the
assignment process will be quicker if you select
the appropriate configuration. In menu K,
As-
signment
, you can change the sequence in any
way you like.
You can choose from any of the following configu-
rations (Î 21.3.):
M-PCM Sequence for M-PCM receivers
MPX-UNI Sequence as MULTIPLEX
Futaba Sequence as robbe / Futaba
JR Sequence as Graupner / JR
The signal format is always Universal (servo centre
= 1.5 ms).
d.
Mode 1 to 4, variable
The double arrows indicate which sticks are used
to control elevator (
è) and rudder (é).
Mode determines the assignment of the primary sticks.
In our example the right-hand stick operates rudder
(
é) and elevator (è). This setting can be changed
at any time. Please refer to Chapters (Î 12.2.5.)
and (Î 13.2.5.).
e.
Assignment
You must select one of the five assignment lists
when you set up a new model (Î 22.1.).
Template used to create
the model
Selected stick mode
(elevator / rudder right)
Selected assignment
Model name
Ö a.
Ö b.
Ö c.
Ö d.
Ö e.
Ö f.
ROYAL
pro
88
The Assignment determines which of the possible
assignment lists for transmitter controls and switches
is to be used for this model. This setting can be
changed subsequently.
f.
OK
Once you have set all the parameters described
above, you must click on the
OK field by pressing
the ENTER button or one of the 3-D digi-adjusters
to conclude the set-up procedure for the new model.
The memory now switches automatically to the model
you have just created, and you can immediately start
fine-tuning the settings.
19.7. Menu: Modulation
In this menu you can activate the new MULTIPLEX
M-PCM encoding process.
If you activate this encoding process, it is also possi-
ble to set the Fail-Safe positions for all servos to-
gether.
! Note:
Any change to the modulation only applies to the cur-
rent model memory.
¦Modulation
¨Exit
M-PCM OFF
set failsafe OFF
a. Activating M-PCM
If you select this menu point and then change the
setting to ON , then the control signal will be en-
coded using the
M-PCM process.
Switching M-PCM to OFF sets the transmitter to
the PPM encoding method, which works with all
makes of equipment.
b. Setting Fail-Safe (
set failsafe)
Requirement:
-
M-PCM must be active.
- The model must be switched on, and under
control from the transmitter.
At this menu point you can set the fail-safe posi-
tions for the individual servos in the model from the
transmitter:
Open the menu point OFF.
Move the transmitter controls to the positions
which are to be stored as the fail-safe settings.
If you now press the REV/CLR button, the data is
transferred to the receiver. The screen display
changes briefly to ON (< 1 sec). When the trans-
mission is complete, the marker jumps back to
OFF.
Press the ENTER button to quit this menu point.
The marker now jumps back to set failsafe.
20. Special facilities
20.1. Using the 3-D digi-adjuster to alter
settings in flight
Many model settings can only be optimised when the
model is in the air. A typical example of this is aileron
differential, or Expo settings.
Each of the two 3-D digi-adjusters can be assigned
any of the parameters which are marked in the menus
with a small hyphen “
-”.
Button
F is used to unlock / lock the allocated values
for alteration:
Example - aileron differential:
1. Select the parameter Aileron differential
Select the menu
£Mixer, Ail.Diff. and press
ENTER to confirm. Select
Diff. and confirm again
with ENTER:
2. Press the Accept button
F
The 3-D digi-adjuster symbol now appears on the
screen instead of the percentage value (%) for the
parameter:
Now press one of the 3-D digi-adjusters to select
the one (left or right) which you wish to use to al-
ter the value in flight.
3. You can now leave the menu and return to the
Status display.
The top line in Status displays 1 - 3 now shows
that aileron differential
Ail.Diff. can be ad-
justed using the right-hand 3-D digi-adjuster:
If you now press or rotate the appropriate 3-D digi-
adjuster, the current set-up value for the parameter
appears on the screen for a moment:
Manual
89
A closed padlock indicates that the value cannot
be altered at the moment (guarding against acci-
dental changes):
Aileron expo allocated to the right-hand 3-D digi-
adjuster
Value locked
If you wish to alter the value, press the allocate
button
F for the 3-D digi-adjuster: the symbol
changes to an open padlock, and the values can
now be adjusted. Any change you make is im-
mediately stored:
Aileron expo allocated to the right-hand 3-D digi-
adjuster
Value unlocked
Another press on the allocate button for the 3-D
digi-adjuster blocks access to the values again
(symbol: closed padlock).
The locking / unlocking process applies to both 3-D
digi-adjusters together.
What can be allocated?
Virtually any parameter with numerical values can be
allocated. However, there are a few exceptions. For
example, the following screen shows that the para-
meter
Step (trim increment size) cannot be allocated
in this way:
Numerical-value parameters which can be allocated
are marked with a high-set hyphen following the para-
meter name. If you attempt to allocate a parameter
which cannot be altered in this way, the following
symbol appears when you press the 3-D digi-adjuster:
ƒ
and an error beep sounds when you press one of the
3-D digi-adjusters.
Erasing an allocation:
This is the procedure for erasing an allocation:
1. Press and hold the corresponding 3-D digi-adjuster
in one of the “Status display” menus.
2. Press the (REV/CLR) button
the screen in the status displays 1 – 3 now
shows “-----------”, to indicate that the allocation
has been erased.
Alternatively you can “overwrite” an existing allocation
at any time simply by allocating a new parameter.
Note:
Allocated parameters cannot be reversed, i.e. it is not
possible to adjust the value beyond
0 or OFF, in order
to guard against accidentally reversing a function.
If you use the flight phase switching facility:
Set-up parameters which have different values in the
various flight phases are displayed according to the
currently active flight phase, and can therefore be ad-
justed separately for each flight phase using the ap-
propriate 3-D digi-adjuster.
20.2. Diagnosis mode operations
It is possible to connect your model directly to the
transmitter using a Diagnosis lead, so that you can
check the system and carry out adjustment work with-
out transmitting an RF signal (Î 20.6.4.). Connecting
the lead switches off the transmitter’s RF module.
This is the procedure:
a. Connect the transmitter (multi-function socket) to
the receiving system in the model using the appro-
priate diagnosis lead (# 8 5105). The receiving
system must include a switch harness with integral
charge socket, e.g. # 8 5039.
b. Switch the transmitter ON first (RF stays off).
c. Switch the receiving system ON.
20.3. PC data back-up / updating
The multi-function socket on the underside of the
ROYAL
pro
provides the functions Charge, Trainer, and
Diagnosis mode, and also acts as a serial interface to
a PC. Two functions are possible via this interface:
x Access to transmitter data.
x Operating model flight simulators.
Data exchange between transmitter and PC enables
you to carry out the following functions:
x Saving model data on a PC (back-up).
x Loading new software into the transmitter.
The last point in particular provides an entirely new
means of updating the transmitter software, and of
changing the on-screen language, using the Internet.
The software required for this is “ROYAL
pro
Data
Manager”, which you can download from our Internet
website.
You will also need a connecting lead # 8 5148 (USB)
or # 8 5156 (serial connection, COM port), both of
which are available as accessories.
ROYAL
pro
90
20.4. Using a flight simulator
Many manufacturers of flight simulators offer interface
leads which can be used to connect MULTIPLEX
transmitters directly to a PC. The MULTIPLEX inter-
face leads (# 8 5148 or # 8 5156) are not designed for
use with simulators.
The free Flying Model Simulator (FMS) can be used
with our USB simulator interface, # 8 5153. It can be
downloaded at no charge from our website www.multi-
plex-rc.de.
If you have further queries regarding the use of the
ROYAL
pro
transmitter with other flight simulators,
please contact the simulator manufacturer.
20.5. Error messages
Every time you switch the transmitter on, the ROYAL
pro
checks the content of its memory. If it detects an
error, the following error message appears:
Memory Error
If this should occur, please note that the transmitter
must not be used again, and no changes should be
made to settings.
The PC back-up and update program ROYAL
pro
DataManager (Î 20.3.) can be used to correct data
errors. This is accomplished by reading out the trans-
mitter data using the ROYAL
pro
DataManager, and
then transferring the data back into the transmitter
again.
If the error message recurs after this procedure, a se-
rious data error is present. The cause is often a hard-
ware defect (possibly caused by failure to observe the
transmitter battery charging instructions, or by using
an unsuitable or faulty battery charger). In this case
the transmitter must be sent to a MULTIPLEX Service
Centre for checking and repair.
20.6. Accessories
20.6.1. HFM-S M-PCM/PPM
Synthesizer RF module
# 4 5600 35 MHz A-band and B-band
# 4 5601 40/41 MHz band
RF module exploiting the latest Synthesizer technology.
The transmission channel can be selected quickly and
coveniently using the Channel Set menu. No trans-
mitter crystals are required.
Important: which channels may be used?
The national regulations regarding the operation of
radio-controlled models vary from country to country.
Before you use the RF module, it is important to deter-
mine which channels are approved for use in the re-
gion where you wish to fly the model.
20.6.2. Scanner for HFM-S M-PCM/
PPM Synthesizer RF module
# 4 5178 35 MHz A-band and B-band
# 4 5179 40/41 MHz band
The scanner is used to monitor the frequency band
and to guard against channel clashes (two transmit-
ters on one frequency). The Scanner module is simply
plugged into the HFM-S M-PCM/PPM Synthesizer RF
module, and is easy to install at any time.
The Scanner can carry out two tasks:
Checking the channel when you switch on
(Channel-Check):
When you switch on, the Scanner checks the channel
selected for the Synthesizer. If your channel is already
in use, the transmitter does not start transmitting; a
warning message is displayed to alert you to the situa-
tion. If the Scanner picks up no signal during the
check, the transmitter switches to normal operation:
Scanning the whole frequency band:
All channels on the frequency band are interrogated in
turn. All signals present are displayed in bar-form on
the screen; the height of the bar reflects the strength
of the signal:
Detailed instructions on using the Scanner module
with the HFM-S M-PCM/PPM Synthesizer RF module
are supplied with the Scanner module.
Manual
91
20.6.3. Trainer lead
# 8 5121
The ROYAL
pro
can be used both as Teacher trans-
mitter and as Pupil transmitter in a Trainer system.
Any MULTIPLEX transmitter with a five-pin DIN socket
(MULTIPLEX multi-function socket) can be used as a
Pupil transmitter (Î 14.4.).
20.6.4. Diagnosis lead
# 8 5105
The receiver can be controlled via a cable, without the
transmitter generating an RF signal, even if the chan-
nel is in use by another transmitter. This is known as
Diagnosis mode (Direct Servo Control), and is useful
when you need to make adjustments to the model.
The transmitter (MULTIPLEX multi-function socket) is
connected to the receiver (charge socket on switch
harness # 8 5039) using the Diagnosis lead. Diagno-
sis mode is only possible with MULTIPLEX receivers
fitted with a combined Battery / Diagnosis socket
marked “B/D”.
20.6.5. Aluminium stick top with switch or but-
ton - installation and functions
Available as an option for the ROYAL
pro
is a pair of
aluminium stick tops with integral push-button or
switch (two-position or three-position):
The transmitter can be expanded as follows:
Clamp
Supp. switch
set to
Assigned
as
a. 1 switch A B C
KSw KSw
b. 1 button C D ---
KTa
c. 1 switch and
1 button
A B C
C D
KSw
---
KSw
KTa
d.
1. button
2. button
B C
C D
K> or <P
---
K> or <P
KTa
a. Installing the stick tops
The aluminium stick tops are installed in a similar
manner to the standard plastic stick tops (Î 9.5.):
1. Remove the old stick tops, open the transmitter
and remove the battery.
2. Thread the wires through
The wires can be pushed through the stick shafts
when the transmitter is open.
Tip:
You will find it easier to slip the wires through if you
curve the cable ends slightly and hold the stick in
one corner position.
3. Install the stick top
Set the stick top to your preferred length, then tighten
the M2 grubscrew on the side to secure it. If the
stick unit has an integral switch, the direction of
operation of the toggle must also be considered.
b. Using the stick switches
The switch connected to the terminal clamps ABC
must first be assigned to the switch
KSw using the
transmitter’s software. This is the procedure:
Main menu:
¡Setup
Menu:
Assignment
Menu point:
Switches
Parameter:
Extra Sw.
Extra Sw. -> KSw
!
This applies to all assignment lists!
c. Connecting the stick button
The stick button in the aluminium stick top must be
connected to the screw-clamps CD:
Stick button connections
The stick button must be entered as KTa at the appro-
priate point in the menu
Assignment, Controls /
Switches.
Example: using the button to activate the primary
flight phase
If you wish to activate the primary (flight) phase when
the button is pressed in, use this procedure:
Main menu:
¡Setup
Menu: Assignment
Sub-menu:
Switches
Parameter: Open
Main phase
Confirm the warning message by pressing ENTER.
Press and hold the stick button.
Conclude the assignment by pressing ENTER.
The
Main phase line in the menu must now look like
this:
Main phase KTa #*
The asterisk “
*” at the end of the line will be displayed
as long as you hold the button pressed in.
d. Connecting a stick switch or second stick button
The stick switch in the aluminium stick top must be
connected to the clamps ABC (see picture below).
Alternatively a second stick top with button can be
connected instead of the switch. In this case you must
use terminal clamps B and C. The following illustration
shows the method of connecting a switch or push-
button:
# 8 5933
2-position
# 8 5931
3-position
# 8 5932
ROYAL
pro
92
1
2
3
2
1
2
-
p
o
s
.
3
-
p
o
s
.
Extra switch connections switch or push-button
This also determines the name by which the switch is
addressed in the transmitter software. The Extra
Switch can be used as a transmitter control (e.g. re-
tract switch, spoilers, …) or as a simple switch (e.g.
flight phases, …).
!
The Extra Switch has priority!
The Extra Switch has priority over the physical con-
trols P, K and the stick switch KSw (Î 9.5.). The con-
trol element installed in the transmitter for the Extra
Switch can be left in the transmitter, but the software
ignores it.
Example: 2-position switch for retracts
Once the switch is installed and connected to the ABC
terminals, the procedure is as follows:
1. Assigning the Extra switch
Main menu:
¡Setup
Menu:
Assignment
Sub-menu:
Switches
Parameter:
Extra Sw.
Open by pressing ENTER, confirm the warning
message, then select
KSw.:
Extra Sw. -> KSw
Confirm with ENTER.
2. Assigning a control for retracts (landing gear)
Main menu:
¡Setup
Menu:
Assignment
Sub-menu:
Controls (not Switches!)
Parameter:
L. gear
Open by pressing ENTER, confirm the warning
message, then move the stick switch
(Quick-Select):
L. gear KSw #*
and confirm with ENTER.
3. Assigning a servo for retracts (landing gear)
Main menu:
¤Servo
Menu:
Assignment
Select desired servo (e.g. Servo
9), open by press-
ing ENTER:
9 L. gear UNI 2P
then confirm with ENTER.
Select
UNI or MPX as signal format,
confirm with ENTER.
Select
2P, as only the two end-points are of inter-
est for servo travel settings,
confirm with ENTER.
4. Reversing the servo and adjusting the
end-points
Main menu:
¤Servo
Menu:
Calibrate
Sub-menu:
9 L. gear
Parameter:
á (to reverse)
P1 and P5 (end-points).
5. Set the transit time if required
Main menu:
¢Control
Menu:
L. gear
Parameter: T
ime
Time — 4.5s
maximum setting 6.0 seconds.
e. Using the second stick button
If one stick button is already installed, the second
must be connected to the terminal clamps BC.
The button connected at this point must be allocated
as
Extra Sw. K> or <P in the software before it can
be assigned as a control or switch.
Tip:
Assign it to
<P if the button is in the left-hand stick,
and
K> if it is in the right-hand stick.
Main menu:
¡Setup
Menu:
Assignment
Menu point:
Switches
Parameter:
Extra Sw.
Extra Sw. -> K>
!
The assignment for Extra Sw. applies to all
the assignment lists. Any switch installed at K or
P and connected to the corner unit is disabled
once you have assigned the Extra Sw.
Manual
93
20.6.6. Retro-fitting switches K and / or P
Two-position or three-position switches can be retro-
fitted at positions K and P at any time:
If you wish to install switches in both positions, please
note that the following combinations are possible:
2 x 2-position
1 x 2-position and 1 x 3-position
NOTE: it is not possible to install two three-
position switches.
To accomplish this you must remove the appropriate
corner unit from the transmitter:
a.) Use the T6 TORX screw-
driver (located in clips in the
transmitter back panel) to
undo the four TORX screws
holding the appropriate corner
unit.
b.) Set the switches to centre,
then carefully withdraw the
corner unit from the trans-
mitter. When you remove the
unit, the rotary knob fitted to
the 3-D digi-adjuster on that
side will come loose.
c.) The switch is fitted in the
corner unit and held in place
by the retaining nut supplied.
Keep the wiring the correct
way round: yellow wire facing
the transmitter battery.
d.) Use a small screwdriver to
press the blind cover out of
the front case panel from the
inside.
e.) Re-install the corner unit,
fit the retaining screws, and
push the knob back onto the
shaft of the 3-D digi-adjuster
(note the correct knob posi-
tion: internal shoulder). Insert
the connector directly into the
micro socket located on the
corner unit (illustration shows
switch K).
a. Two-position switch
The two-position switches with the Order No. # 7 5748
can be installed in the wells P and / or K. Once in-
stalled, they must be connected to the appropriate
sockets on the left or right corner unit:
Corner unit with socket for switches P and K
(illustration shows switch P)
The switches can be used directly as controls P and /
or
K in the menus ¡Assignment, Switches and
¡Assignment, Controls. No software assignment
is required for the
Extra Sw..
b. Three-position switch
If you install a three-position switch in position P or K,
you must connect it to the terminal clamp on the main
circuit board (ABC Î Fig. in 20.6.5.d.). For this rea-
son the wires attached to this switch have bare wire
ends (Order No. # 7 5749).
This switch must also be assigned as
K>, <P or KSw
before it is used. This procedure is carried out in the
menu
¡Assignment, Switches under Extra Sw..
20.6.7. Additional accessories, replacement parts
Item
Transmitter case
# 76 3323
Transmitter aerial, 140 cm, stainless st.
# 89 3001
Stub helical aerial, 35 MHz
# 7 5126
Stub helical aerial, 40 / 41 MHz
# 7 5127
ROYAL
pro
stub aerial adapter
# 7 5117
ROYAL
pro
/ evo transmitter tray
# 8 5307
PROFI transmitter neckstrap
# 8 5646
Neckstrap pad for # 8 5646
# 8 5641
“Cross-over” transmitter support strap
# 8 5640
USB PC lead
# 8 5148
Transmitter charge lead
# 8 6020
2 aluminium stick tops, long
# 8 5930
2 aluminium stick tops, long
1 x with two-position switch
# 8 5931
2 aluminium stick tops, long
1 x with three-position switch
# 8 5932
2 aluminium stick tops, long
1 x with push-button
# 8 5933
2 aluminium stick tops, short
# 7 5304
ON / OFF switch for P or K
# 7 5748
ON / OFF / ON switch for P or K
Connection to screw terminal clamp instead
of stick with switch / button
# 7 5749
P K
2
4
1
3
ROYAL
pro
94
For more information on accessories and replacement
parts please refer to the current main catalogue, or
our Internet website: www.multiplex-rc.de.
21. Model templates in detail
21.1. Fixed-wing model aircraft
!
The next two steps must always be carried out
when you are setting up a new fixed-wing model:
a. Check stick functions (aileron / elevator / rudder).
Select different stick mode if necessary:
L,
Assignment, Mode
b. Check direction of servo rotation for all functions
Reverse servo directions if necessary (REVERSE):
K,
Calibrate, select servo,
Parameter
á.
Note regarding V-tail models:
If your model is fitted with a V-tail, change the
As-
signment
in the menu K Servo as follows:
Elevator or ELEVATR+
replace with
V-TAIL+,
Rudder
replace with
V-TAIL+.
! The descriptions in the model templates will
only be correct if the mixer definitions and the
transmitter control and switch assignments still
match the factory default settings.
Details in the model template descriptions.
The following points are listed in the descriptions:
Suitable for:
Model category, and several models as examples of
what can be operated using the template in question.
Assigned transmitter controls and switches:
Transmitter control and switch functions assigned by
default. The standard settings are as follows:
Transmitter Controls to
100%,
D/R (Dual Rate) to 100%,
Expo to 0%.
Assigned servos / receiver outputs:
What is controlled using which receiver output or
servo. When setting up a
New model you can choose
any of four different servo configurations.
!
To avoid the illustrations becoming too clut-
tered, the four possible assignments are grouped
together in the summary (Î 21.3.) “Servo configu-
rations”.
Timer settings:
How the
Timers in the model template are prepared,
and the method of controlling them.
Additional functions:
E.g.
Tow rel. in the model template GLIDER.
Fine-tuning:
What must and can be checked or adjusted when you
are setting up a model in the model memory.
Mixers:
Summary of the default
Mixer facilities.
Manual
95
21.1.1. BASIC model template
Suitable for:
Simple power models
with one or two aileron servos,
with spoilers (airbrakes or landing flaps).
Typical models:
EASYCUB, MiniMag, Mentor,
TwinStar, Big Lift.
Assigned transmitter controls and switches:
Assignment used:
POWER
Not used: Flap (F)
You will find an overview of the global assignment of
transmitter controls and switches in Chapter (Î 22.1.).
Assigned servos / receiver outputs:
To ensure that the template can be used for as many
models as possible, more servos are assigned than
are required for the model shown in the illustration:
Servo configuration MPX-UNI
Timer setting: motor run time
Sum timer
´ controlled by Throttle (‡).
Fine-tuning:
!
Steps a. and b. (Î 21.1.),
Check functions.
c. Activate throttle to elevator mixer
G, select
ELEVATR+, select Thr -Tr input,
set
10% down-elevator.
If you wish to adjust the value in flight, allocate it to
one of the 3-D digi-adjusters (Î 20.1.).
Mixers:
Mixer Input Note
Combi Sw.
Mixer: Combi-Switch
Î 12.11.2.
Ail-Diff.
Aileron differential
Î 12.6.
Controls
Mix
Mixer: Controls Mix
Î 16.1.3.
ELEVATR+ Elevator
trv' = Control surface deflection
for down-elevator
trv# = Control surface deflec-
tion for up-elevator
Spoiler
Elevator trim correction for Spoiler
(airbrakes):
pt1 = Elevator compensation for
half-deployed spoilers
pt2 = Elevator compensation for
fully deployed spoilers
Flap
Elevator trim correction for Flap
(Flaperon):
trv' = Elevator compensation for
(e.g.) thermal setting
trv# = Elevator compensation for
(e.g.) speed setting
Thr -Tr
Elevator trim correction for throttle
(motor):
dead = Dead-zone / from which
point does elevator cor-
rection take effect?
trv = Elevator com
p
ensation for
full-throttle
V-TAIL+
*
Elevator
trv' = Control surface deflection
for down-elevator
trv# = Control surface deflection
for up-elevator
Rudder
trv' = Control surface deflection
for rudder in one direction
(e.g. up)
trv# = Control surface deflection
for rudder in the other di-
rection (e.g. down)
Spoiler
Elevator trim correction for Spoiler
(airbrakes):
pt1 = Elevator compensation for
half-deployed spoilers
pt2 = Elevator compensation for
fully deployed spoilers
Flap
Elevator trim correction for Flap:
trv' = Elevator com
p
ensation for
(e.g.) Thermal setting
trv# = Elevator compensation for
(e.g.) Speed setting
Thr -Tr
Elevator trim correction for throttle
(motor):
dead = Dead-zone / from which
point does elevator cor-
rection take effect?
trv = Elevator compensation for
full-throttle
* only appears if V-TAIL+ is active
ROYAL
pro
96
21.1.2. ACRO model template
Suitable for:
Power models such as F3A (formerly RC1), F3AX,
Fun-fly models.
Typical models:
Sky Cat, AcroMaster.
Assigned transmitter controls and switches:
Assignment used:
POWER
Not used: Flap (F)
You will find an overview of the global assignment of
transmitter controls and switches in Chapter (Î 22.1.).
Assigned servos / receiver outputs:
1
2
3
4
5
AILERON+
Rudder
ELEVATR+
AILERON+
Throttle
Servo configuration MPX-UNI
Timer setting: Motor run time
Sum timer
´ controlled by Throttle (‡)
Fine-tuning:
!
Steps a. and b. (Î 21.1.).
Check functions.
c. Activate throttle to elevator mixer
G, select
ELEVATR+, select Thr -Tr input,
set
10% down-elevator.
If you wish to adjust the value in flight, allocate it to
one of the 3-D digi-adjusters (Î 20.1.).
d. Activate flap to elevator mixer
G, select
ELEVATR+, select Flap input,
trv' = 5%, trv# = set 10%.
If you wish to adjust the value in flight, allocate it to
one of the 3-D digi-adjusters (Î 20.1.).
Mixers:
Mixer Input Note
Combi Sw.
Mixer: Combi-Switch
Î 12.11.2.
Ail-Diff.
Aileron differential
Î 12.6.
Controls
Mix
Mixer: Controls Mix
Î 16.1.3.
ELEVATR+ Elevator
trv' = Control surface deflection
for down-elevator
trv# = Control surface deflec-
tion for up-elevator
Spoiler
Elevator trim correction for Spoiler
(airbrakes):
pt1 = Elevator compensation for
half-deployed spoilers
pt2 = Elevator compensation for
fully deployed spoilers
Flap
Elevator trim correction for Flap
(Flaperon):
trv' = Elevator com
p
ensation for
(e.g.) thermal setting
trv# = Elevator compensation for
(e.g.) speed setting
Thr -Tr
Elevator trim correction for throttle
(motor):
dead = Dead-zone / from which
point does elevator cor-
rection take effect?
trv = Elevator com
p
ensation for
full-throttle
AILERON+ Aileron
Setting for maximum aileron travel
when the Aileron transmitter con-
trol is operated:
trv = Symmetrical deflections
( equal aileron travels
up and down)
Aileron differential is set and ad-
justed in the mixer Ail.Diff.
Spoiler
When the Spoiler control is
operated, both ailerons move in the
same direction (e.g. up) to act as
landing aid:
offs = Offset value
trv = Aileron deflection at full
Spoiler travel
Flap
When the transmitter control Flap is
moved, both ailerons move up or
down together to alter the camber of
the wing section in order to opti-
mise the wing for thermal and speed
flying:
trv' = Aileron deflection, e.g. up
for speed flying
trv# = Aileron deflection, e.g.
down for thermal flying
Ele -Tr
When the elevator stick is operated,
both ailerons deflect up or down in
order to amplify the elevator effect
for aerobatics (“snap-flap mixer”):
trv' = Aileron deflection when
down-elevator is applied
trv# = Aileron deflection when
up-elevator is applied
This mixer can be switched off and
on at any time using the SNAP-
FLAP switch
Manual
97
V-TAIL+
*
Elevator
trv' = Control surface deflection
for down-elevator
trv# = Control surface deflection
for up-elevator
Rudder
trv' = Control surface deflection
for rudder in one direction
(e.g. up)
trv# = Control surface deflection
for rudder in the other di-
rection (e.g. down)
Spoiler
Elevator trim correction for Spoiler
(airbrakes):
pt1 = Elevator compensation for
half-deployed spoilers
pt2 = Elevator compensation for
fully deployed spoilers
Flap
Elevator trim correction for Flap:
trv' = Elevator com
p
ensation for
(e.g.) Thermal setting
trv# = Elevator compensation for
(e.g.) Speed setting
Thr -Tr
Elevator trim correction for throttle
(motor):
dead = Dead-zone / from which
point does elevator cor-
rection take effect?
trv = Elevator compensation for
full-throttle
* only appears if V-TAIL+ is active
21.1.3.
HOTLINER model template
Suitable for:
F5B.
Typical models:
BLIZZARD (V-tail required (Î 21.1.)), Bonito,
Akro, Akro Star.
Assigned transmitter controls and switches:
Assignment used:
POWER
Not used: Combi-Switch (N),
Spoiler (E), Flap (F).
You will find an overview of the global assignment of
transmitter controls and switches in Chapter (Î 22.1.).
Assigned servos / receiver outputs:
1
2
5
4
AILERON+
Throttle
AILERON+
ELEVATR+
Servo configuration MPX-UNI
Timer setting: Motor run time
Sum timer ´ controlled by Throttle (‡).
Fine-tuning:
!
Steps a. and b. (Î 21.1.),
Check functions.
c. Ailerons raised as landing aid
This function is already programmed in the tem-
plate (all mixer inputs =
0%) and is operated using
the transmitter control
Spoiler (slider E). You
may need to add the trim correction input (
15%) to
the
ELEVATR+ mixer.
d. Activate throttle to elevator mixer
G, select
ELEVATR+, select Thr -Tr input,
set
10% down-elevator.
If you wish to adjust the value in flight, allocate it to
one of the 3-D digi-adjusters (Î 20.1.).
ROYAL
pro
98
Mixers:
Mixer Input Note
Combi Sw.
Mixer: Combi-Switch
Î 12.11.2.
Ail-Diff.
Aileron differential
Î 12.6.
Controls
Mix
Mixer: Controls Mix
Î 16.1.3.
ELEVATR+ Elevator
trv' = Control surface deflection
for down-elevator
trv# = Control surface deflec-
tion for up-elevator
Spoiler
Elevator trim correction for Spoiler
(airbrakes):
pt1 = Elevator compensation for
half-deployed spoilers
pt2 = Elevator compensation for
fully deployed spoilers
Flap
Elevator trim correction for Flap
(Flaperon):
trv' = Elevator com
p
ensation for
(e.g.) thermal setting
trv# = Elevator compensation for
(e.g.) speed setting
Thr -Tr
Elevator trim correction for throttle
(motor):
dead = Dead-zone / from which
point does elevator cor-
rection take effect?
trv = Elevator com
p
ensation for
full-throttle
AILERON+ Aileron
Setting for maximum aileron travel
when the Aileron transmitter con-
trol is operated:
trv = Symmetrical deflections
( equal aileron travels
up and down)
Aileron differential is set and ad-
justed in the mixer Ail.Diff.
Spoiler
When the Spoiler control is
operated, both ailerons move in the
same direction (e.g. up) to act as
landing aid:
offs = Offset value
trv = Aileron deflection at full
Spoiler travel
Flap
When the transmitter control Flap is
moved, both ailerons move up or
down together to alter the camber of
the wing section in order to opti-
mise the wing for thermal and speed
flying:
trv' = Aileron deflection, e.g. up
for speed flying
trv# = Aileron deflection, e.g.
down for thermal flying
Ele -Tr
When the elevator stick is operated,
both ailerons deflect up or down in
order to amplify the elevator effect
for aerobatics (“snap-flap mixer”):
trv' = Aileron deflection when
down-elevator is applied
trv# = Aileron deflection when
up-elevator is applied
This mixer can be switched off and
on at any time using the Snap-Flap
switch
V-TAIL+
*
Elevator
trv' = Control surface deflection
for down-elevator
trv# = Control surface deflection
for up-elevator
Rudder
trv' = Control surface deflection
for rudder in one direction
(e.g. up)
trv# = Control surface deflection
for rudder in the other di-
rection (e.g. down)
Spoiler
Elevator trim correction for Spoiler
(airbrakes):
pt1 = Elevator compensation for
half-deployed spoilers
pt2 = Elevator compensation for
fully deployed spoilers
Flap
Elevator trim correction for Flap:
trv' = Elevator compensation for
(e.g.) Thermal setting
trv# = Elevator compensation for
(e.g.) Speed setting
Thr -Tr
Elevator trim correction for throttle
(motor):
dead = Dead-zone / from which
point does elevator cor-
rection take effect?
trv = Elevator compensation for
full-throttle
* only appears if V-TAIL+ is active
Manual
99
21.1.4. DELTA model template
Suitable for:
Deltas / flying wings, powered or unpowered, jets.
Typical models:
TWIN-JET, FunJet, TWISTER.
Assigned transmitter controls and switches:
Assignment used: POWER
Not used: Combi-Switch (N),
Spoiler (E), Flap (F)
You will find an overview of the global assignment of
transmitter controls and switches in Chapter (Î 22.1.).
Assigned servos / receiver outputs:
1
5
4
DELTA+
Throttle
DELTA+
Servo configuration MPX-UNI
Timer setting: Motor run time
Sum timer ´ controlled by Throttle (‡).
Fine-tuning:
!
Steps a. and b. (Î 21.1.),
Check functions.
c. Using receivers with fewer than five channels
Change servo assignment: K
Servo, Assign-
ment
:
e.g.
1 DELTA+, 2 DELTA+, 3 Throttle.
d. Control surface travels too large or too small
G , select
DELTA+ mixer, adjust Elevator and / or
Aileron inputs.
e. Activate throttle to elevator mixer
G, select
DELTA+, select Thr -Tr input,
set
10% down-elevator.
If you wish to adjust the value in flight, allocate it to
one of the 3-D digi-adjusters (Î 20.1.).
Mixers:
Mixer Input Note
Combi Sw.
Mixer: Combi-Switch
Î 12.11.2.
Ail.Diff.
Aileron differential
Î 12.6.
Controls
Mix
Mixer: Controls Mix
Î 16.1.3.
DELTA+ Aileron
Setting for maximum deflection of the
elevons (opposite directions) when the
transmitter control Aileron is moved:
trv = Symmetrical travels
(Same aileron travels up and
down)
If you require differential aileron travel,
use Ail.Diff.
Elevator
trv' = Elevon travel for down-elevator
trv# = Elevon travel for up-elevator
Thr. -Tr
Elevator trim correction for throttle (mo-
tor):
dead. = Dead-zone / from which
point does elevator
correction take effect?
trv = Elevator compensation for full-
throttle
ROYAL
pro
100
21.1.5. GLIDER model template
Suitable for:
Gliders with two wing flaps (ailerons only),
with electric power system, also with V-tail.
Typical models:
EasyGlider.
Assigned transmitter controls and switches:
Assignment used:
GLIDER
Not used: Flap (F)
You will find an overview of the global assignment of
transmitter controls and switches in Chapter (Î 22.1.).
Assigned servos / receiver outputs:
1
2
4
5
3
6
7
AILERON+
Throttle
AILERON+
ELEVATR+
Rudder
Spoiler
Spoiler
Servo configuration MPX-UNI
Timer setting: motor run time
Sum timer ´ controlled by Throttle (‡).
Tow release:
If your model features a tow release instead of a
power system, you can operate it using servo
4. The
following steps are necessary:
1. Assign transmitter controls
L,
Assignment, Controls, then select Tow rel..
Select transmitter control (e.g. button
M).
2. Assign servo
K ,
Assignment, select servo 4, change from
Throttle to Tow rel..
3. Adjust servo
The direction of rotation and end-points for servo
4
are set under K,
Calibrate.
Fine-tuning:
!
Steps a. and b. (Î 21.1.),
Check functions.
c. Ailerons raised as landing aid ...
... if your model has no airbrakes (servos
6 / 7):
G , select
AILERON+, set Spoiler input to 90%.
Adjust the correction input for
ELEVATR+ if neces-
sary.
d. Activate throttle to elevator mixer
G, select
ELEVATR+, select Thr -Tr input,
set
10% down-elevator.
If you wish to adjust the value in flight, allocate it to
one of the 3-D digi-adjusters (Î 20.1.).
Mixers:
Mixer Input Note
Combi Sw.
Mixer: Combi-Switch
Î 12.11.2.
Ail-Diff.
Aileron differential
Î 12.6.
Controls
Mix
Mixer: Controls Mix
Î 16.1.3.
ELEVATR+ Elevator
trv' = Control surface deflection
for down-elevator
trv# = Control surface deflec-
tion for up-elevator
Spoiler
Elevator trim correction for Spoiler
(airbrakes):
pt1 = Elevator compensation for
half-deployed spoilers
pt2 = Elevator compensation for
fully deployed spoilers
Flap
Elevator trim correction for Flap
(Flaperon):
trv' = Elevator com
p
ensation for
(e.g.) thermal setting
trv# = Elevator compensation for
(e.g.) speed setting
Thr -Tr
Elevator trim correction for throttle
(motor):
dead = Dead-zone / from which
point does elevator cor-
rection take effect?
trv = Elevator com
p
ensation for
full-throttle
AILERON+ Aileron
Setting for maximum aileron travel
when the Aileron transmitter con-
trol is operated:
trv = Symmetrical deflections
( equal aileron travels
up and down)
Aileron differential is set and ad-
justed in the mixer Ail.Diff.
Spoiler
When the Spoiler control is
operated, both ailerons move in the
same direction (e.g. up) to act as
landing aid:
offs = Offset value
trv = Aileron deflection at full
Spoiler travel
Flap
When the transmitter control Flap is
moved, both ailerons move up or
down together to alter the camber of
the wing section in order to opti-
mise the wing for thermal and speed
flying:
trv' = Aileron deflection, e.g. up
for speed flying
trv# = Aileron deflection, e.g.
down for thermal flying
Ele -Tr
When the elevator stick is operated,
both ailerons deflect up or down in
order to amplify the elevator effect
for aerobatics (“snap-flap mixer”):
trv' = Aileron deflection when
down-elevator is applied
trv# = Aileron deflection when
up-elevator is applied
This mixer can be switched off and
on at any time using the Snap-Flap
switch
Manual
101
V-TAIL+
*
Elevator
trv' = Control surface deflection
for down-elevator
trv# = Control surface deflection
for up-elevator
Rudder
trv' = Control surface deflection
for rudder in one direction
(e.g. up)
trv# = Control surface deflection
for rudder in the other di-
rection (e.g. down)
Spoiler
Elevator trim correction for Spoiler
(airbrakes):
pt1 = Elevator compensation for
half-deployed spoilers
pt2 = Elevator compensation for
fully deployed spoilers
Flap
Elevator trim correction for Flap:
trv' = Elevator compensation for
(e.g.) Thermal setting
trv# = Elevator compensation for
(e.g.) Speed setting
Thr -Tr
Elevator trim correction for throttle
(motor):
dead = Dead-zone / from which
point does elevator cor-
rection take effect?
trv = Elevator compensation for
full-throttle
* only appears if V-TAIL+ is active
21.1.6. 4 FLAPS model template
Suitable for:
F3B, F3J,
Gliders with four wing flaps, with electric power
system, also with V-tail.
Typical models:
DG 600, ASW 27, Milan, E
URO /ELEKTRO-MASTER,
Alpina, ASH 26.
Assigned transmitter controls and switches:
Assignment used:
GLIDER
You will find an overview of the global assignment of
transmitter controls and switches in Chapter (Î 22.1.).
Assigned servos / receiver outputs:
1
2
4
5
6
3
7
8
9
Spoiler
Spoiler
AILERON+
Throttle
AILERON+
ELEVATR+
Rudder
FLAP+
FLAP+
Servo configuration MPX-UNI
Timer setting: Motor run time
Sum timer ´ controlled by Throttle (E).
Tow release instead of Throttle: (Î 21.1.5.)
GLIDER.
Fine-tuning:
!
Steps a. and b. (Î 21.1.),
Check functions.
c. Activate throttle to elevator mixer
G, select
ELEVATR+, select Thr -Tr input,
set
10% down-elevator.
If you wish to adjust the value in flight, allocate it to
one of the 3-D digi-adjusters (Î 20.1.).
d. Special features when calibrating the servos
FLAP+ and AILERON+
(input:
Spoiler, Parameter: offs = OFFSET)
Models with a four-flap wing generally employ what
is known as the Butterfly or Crow system as a land-
ing aid: ailerons max. up, camber-changing flaps
max. down. For this function the flap servos, in par-
ticular, have a highly asymmetrical working range:
The maximum control surface travel in the up-
direction (approx. 20°) is required for aileron con-
trol. For landing the flaps are required to deflect
down as far as possible in order to achieve maxi-
mum braking effect (if possible > 60°).
This means that the servo travel must be greatly
reduced in the up-direction, unless the servo output
lever is not already installed “offset” (mechanical
differential). As a result valuable servo travel is for-
feited, available servo power is wasted, and you
have to accept unnecessarily high gearbox play,
reduced servo resolution and increased shock
loads on servo gears in hard landings.
ROYAL
pro
102
This can be avoided using the following procedure:
1. Install the servo output levers for the flap and
aileron servos at right-angles to the pushrods.
2. Determine the centre of the working range of
the control surface:
For example: the working range of the control
surface (e.g. camber-changing flap) is from
+20° ... -60°, starting from the neutral position
(flap in line with airfoil)
The centre of the flap’s working range is
therefore -20°.
Now adjust the flap pushrod so that the flap is
at the -20° point when the servo is at centre.
Tip:
First select the servo in the menu
Servo.Ca-
librate
, then select the percentage value for
the point
P3, and finally press the allocate
button for the 3-D digi-adjuster; the servo now
runs to its exact centre position.
3. Both servos
FLAP+ and AILERON+ should now
be calibrated at points
P1, P3 and P5 (also
points
P2 and P4 if necessary), so that both
pairs of control surfaces are at exactly the same
deflection at all points (in our example at +20° /
-20° / -60°.
4. Now adjust the parameter
offs for the mixer
input
Spoiler in the mixers FLAP+ and
AILERON+ in such a way that the control sur-
faces line up correctly.
The following diagram clearly shows the principle
of this set-up:
Mixers:
Mixer Input Note
Combi Sw.
Mixer: Combi-Switch
Î 12.11.2.
Ail-Diff.
Aileron differential
Î 12.6.
Controls
Mix
Mixer: Controls Mix
Î 16.1.3.
ELEVATR+ Elevator
trv' = Control surface deflection
for down-elevator
trv# = Control surface deflec-
tion for up-elevator
Spoiler
Elevator trim correction for Spoiler
(airbrakes):
pt1 = Elevator compensation for
half-deployed spoilers
pt2 = Elevator compensation for
fully deployed spoilers
Flap
Elevator trim correction for Flap
(Flaperon):
trv' = Elevator com
p
ensation for
(e.g.) thermal setting
trv# = Elevator compensation for
(e.g.) speed setting
Thr -Tr
Elevator trim correction for throttle
(motor):
dead = Dead-zone / from which
point does elevator cor-
rection take effect?
trv = Elevator com
p
ensation for
full-throttle
AILERON+ Aileron
Setting for maximum aileron travel
when the Aileron transmitter con-
trol is operated:
trv = Symmetrical deflections
( equal aileron travels
up and down)
Aileron differential is set and ad-
justed in the mixer Ail.Diff.
Spoiler
When the Spoiler control is
operated, both ailerons move in the
same direction (e.g. up) to act as
landing aid:
offs = Offset value
trv = Aileron deflection at full
Spoiler travel
Flap
When the transmitter control Flap is
moved, both ailerons move up or
down together to alter the camber of
the wing section in order to opti-
mise the wing for thermal and speed
flying:
trv' = Aileron deflection, e.g. up
for speed flying
trv# = Aileron deflection, e.g.
down for thermal flying
Ele -Tr
When the elevator stick is operated,
both ailerons deflect up or down in
order to amplify the elevator effect
for aerobatics (“snap-flap mixer”):
trv' = Aileron deflection when
down-elevator is applied
trv# = Aileron deflection when
up-elevator is applied
This mixer can be switched off and
on at any time using the Snap-Flap
switch
+20°
-60°
-20°
N
eutral position
Offset offs
Manual
103
FLAP+ Flap
When the transmitter control Flap is
operated, the camber-changing flaps
move up or down together in order
to alter the camber of the wing sec-
tion for optimising the wing for
thermal and speed flying:
trv' = Flap deflection, e.g. up
for speed flying
trv# = Flap deflection, e.g. down
for thermal flying
Set the values in such a way that the
airfoil camber of the flaps and ailer-
ons is even over the full wingspan
Spoiler
When the transmitter control
Spoiler is operated, both the cam-
ber-changing flaps deflect down
together to act as a landing aid:
offs = Offset for flap servos (see
notes below on calibrating
the AILERON+ servos for
four-flap gliders)
trv = Aileron deflection when
spoilers are fully deployed
When ailerons deflect up and flaps
deflect down in response to the
Spoiler transmitter control, the re-
sult is what is known as the Butter-
fly or Crow landing system
Aileron
Maximum setting of camber-
changing flap travels (opposite di-
rections) when the transmitter con-
trol Aileron is operated:
trv' = Deflection of both flaps in
one direction (e.g. up)
trv# = Deflection of both flaps in
the other direction (e.g.
down)
If asymmetrical travels are selected,
aileron differential (set using
Ail.Diff.) can be adjusted to main-
tain the deflection of the camber-
changing flaps, or to set them inde-
pendently of the ailerons if neces-
sary.
This mixer input is switchable if a
physical switch is assigned to it. For
example, the input can be switched
on for aerobatic flying to enhance
aileron response
Ele -Tr
When the elevator stick is operated,
both ailerons deflect up or down in
order to amplify the elevator effect
for aerobatics (“snap-flap mixer”):
trv' = Aileron deflection when
down-elevator is applied
trv# = Aileron deflection when
up-elevator is applied
This mixer can be switched off and
on at any time using the Snap-Flap
switch
V-TAIL+
*
Elevator
trv' = Control surface deflection
for down-elevator
trv# = Control surface deflection
for up-elevator
Rudder
trv' = Control surface deflection
for rudder in one direction
(e.g. up)
trv# = Control surface deflection
for rudder in the other di-
rection (e.g. down)
Spoiler
Elevator trim correction for Spoiler
(airbrakes):
pt1 = Elevator compensation for
half-deployed spoilers
pt2 = Elevator compensation for
fully deployed spoilers
Flap
Elevator trim correction for Flap:
trv' = Elevator com
p
ensation for
(e.g.) Thermal setting
trv# = Elevator compensation for
(e.g.) Speed setting
Thr -Tr
Elevator trim correction for throttle
(motor):
dead = Dead-zone / from which
point does elevator cor-
rection take effect?
trv = Elevator compensation for
full-throttle
* only appears if V-TAIL+ is active
ROYAL
pro
104
21.2. Model helicopters
21.2.1. HELImech model template
Suitable for:
Main rotor control system with mechanical mixers.
Typical models:
Ergo, Futura, Moskito, Raptor.
Assigned transmitter controls and switches:
Assignment used:
HELI
You will find an overview of the global assignment of
transmitter controls and switches in Chapter (Î 22.1.).
Assigned servos / receiver outputs:
Servo configuration MPX-UNI
Timer setting: Motor run time
Sum timer ´ controlled by throttle limiter (F).
Fine-tuning:
a. Check stick functions (roll / pitch / yaw).
Select different stick mode if necessary:
L,
Assignment, Mode.
b. Check servo directions for all functions.
Reverse servos if necessary (REVERSE):
K,
Calibrate, select servo, Parameter REV/TRM.
c. Gyro
(Î 13.7.).
21.2.2.
HELIccpm model template
Suitable for:
Main rotor control system with electronic mixers
CCPM (Cyclic Collective Pitch Mixing)
with three or four servos, 90° to 150°.
Typical models:
Raptor E550, T-Rex 450 – 600, ECO 8, Logo,
Fury, Three Dee NT, Uni-Expert.
Assigned transmitter controls and switches:
Assignment used:
HELI
You will find an overview of the global assignment of
transmitter controls and switches in Chapter (Î 22.1.).
Assigned servos / receiver outputs:
In the model template
HELIccpm we assume a 120°
swashplate with pitch-axis servo at the rear:
Servo configuration MPX-UNI
Timer setting: Motor run time
Sum timer ´ controlled by throttle limiter (F).
Fine-tuning:
a. Check stick functions (roll / pitch / yaw).
Select a different mode if necessary:
L,
Assignment, Mode.
b. Check direction of servo rotation for all functions
Reverse servo direction if necessary (REVERSE):
K,
Calibrate, select servo, parameter REV/TRM.
c. Possible gyro facilities
(Î 13.7.).
Manual
105
21.3. Servo configurations
BASIC
M-PCM MPX-UNI Futaba JR
1
Aileron Aileron Aileron Throttle
2
Aileron ELEVATR+ ELEVATR+ Aileron
3
ELEVATR+ Rudder Throttle ELEVATR+
4
Rudder Throttle Rudder Rudder
5
Throttle Aileron Aileron Aileron
6
Spoiler Spoiler Spoiler Spoiler
7
Spoiler Spoiler Spoiler Spoiler
Model template BASIC for:
powered trainers,
simple gliders,
power models with landing flaps (assigned as Spoiler),
with one or two aileron servos.
ACRO
M-PCM MPX-UNI Futaba JR
1
AILERON+ AILERON+ AILERON+ Throttle
2
AILERON+ ELEVATR+ ELEVATR+ AILERON+
3
ELEVATR+ Rudder Throttle ELEVATR+
4
Rudder Throttle Rudder Rudder
5
Throttle AILERON+ AILERON+ AILERON+
Model template ACRO for:
aerobatic models,
FunFlyer
3D.
HOTLINER
AILERON+
Throttle
AILERON+
ELEVATR+
e.g.:
spoiler,
retract
Rudder
DELTA
M-PCM MPX-UNI Futaba JR
1
AILERON+ AILERON+ AILERON+ Throttle
2
AILERON+ ELEVATR+ ELEVATR+ AILERON+
3
ELEVATR+ -------- Throttle ELEVATR+
4
-------- Throttle --------
5
Throttle AILERON+ AILERON+ AILERON+
Model template HOTLINER for:
powered and high-speed powered gliders (hot-liners) with cross-tail or V-tail.
Expansion:
Rudder.
M-PCM MPX-UNI Futaba JR
1
DELTA+ DELTA+ DELTA+ Throttle
2
DELTA+ -------- DELTA+ DELTA+
3
-------- -------- Throttle --------
4
-------- Throttle --------
5
Throttle DELTA+ -------- DELTA+
Model template DELTA for:
flying wings, powered and unpowered, two wing flaps.
Expansions:
four wing flaps, rudder, ...
AILERON+
AILERON+
Rudder
ELEVATR+
Throttle
e.g.:
retracts,
tow release
Aileron
Aileron
Throttle
Rudder
ELEVATR+
e.g.:
tow release,
nosewheel
ROYAL
pro
106
GLIDER
M-PCM MPX-UNI Futaba
JR
1
AILERON+ AILERON+ AILERON+ Spoiler
2
AILERON+ ELEVATR+ ELEVATR+ AILERON+
3
ELEVATR+ Rudder Throttle ELEVATR+
4
Rudder Throttle Rudder Rudder
5
Throttle AILERON+ AILERON+ AILERON+
6
Spoiler Spoiler Spoiler Spoiler
7
Spoiler Spoiler Spoiler Throttle
Model template GLIDER for:
gliders with two wing flaps (ailerons only), with electric power system,
also with V-tail.
Expansion:
Tow-release instead of power system.
4-FLAP
M-PCM MPX-UNI Futaba JR
1
AILERON+ AILERON+ AILERON+ Spoiler
2
AILERON+ ELEVATR+ ELEVATR+ AILERON+
3
FLAP+ Rudder Throttle ELEVATR+
4
FLAP+ Throttle Rudder Rudder
5
ELEVATR+ AILERON+ AILERON+ AILERON+
6
Rudder FLAP+ FLAP+ FLAP+
7
Spoiler FLAP+ FLAP+ FLAP+
8
Spoiler Spoiler Spoiler Spoiler
9
Throttle Spoiler Spoiler Throttle
Model template 4FLAPS for:
glider with four flaps, with electric power system, with V-tail, F3B, F3J.
HELImech
HELIccpm
M-PCM MPX-UNI Futaba JR
1
HEAD ri HEAD f/b HEAD le Throttle
2
HEAD le HEAD le HEAD f/b HEAD ri
3
HEAD f/b TAIL Throttle
HEAD f/b
4
TAIL HEAD ri TAIL TAIL
5
Throttle Throttle Gyro --------
6
Gyro Gyro HEAD ri HEAD le
7
Gyro
Main rotor control system with electronic mixers
CCPM (Cyclic Collective Pitch Mixing),
with three or four servos,
90° to 150°.
M-PCM MPX-UNI Futaba JR
1
Aileron Aileron Aileron Throttle
2
Elevator Elevator Elevator Aileron
3
TAIL TAIL Throttle Elevator
4
Collect. Collect.
TAIL TAIL
5
Throttle Throttle Gyro --------
6
Gyro Gyro
Collect. Collect.
7
Gyro
Model template HELImech for:
Main rotor control linkage with mechanical mixers.
AILERON+
AILERON+
ELEVATR+
Rudder
FLAP+
FLAP+
p.ex.:
tow release,
spoiler,
retract
Throttle
TAIL
Elevator
(pitch-axis)
Aileron
(roll)
Collect.
Gyro
e.g.:
speed controller
Throttle
Gyro
TAIL
HEAD f/b
D
i
r
e
c
t
i
o
n
o
f
f
l
i
g
h
t
HEADri
HEAD le
e.g.:
speed controller
Manual
107
22. Appendix: “global” lists
22.1. Global transmitter control and switch assignments
for fixed-
wing
models
1.
POWER
2.
GLIDER
for
helicopters
3.
HELI
4.
4.....
..
5.
5.......
Controls:
Throttle (Idle)*
Spoiler
(Idle)*
Flap/RPM
L. gear
Tow rel.
Brake
Gyro
Mixture
AUX1
AUX2
Collect.
Thr.lim.
Extra Sw.
Switches:
DR-ai
DR-el
DR-ru
CS/DTC
Throttle-cut
|Slot
´Sum
¶¶Interval
Mix-1
Mix-2
Mix-3
Teacher
Main phase
Phases 1-3
Extra Sw.
‡ #
E '
F #
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
L #
L #
L #
N #
H „
---
‡ '
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
E #
‡ '
F #
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
L #
L #
L #
N #
H „
---
E '
---
G #
---
---
---
---
---
---
Controls:
Throttle
Spoiler
Flap/RPM
L. gear
Tow rel.
Brake
Gyro
Mixture
AUX1
AUX2
Collect.
(minimum)*
Thr.limit
(minimum)*
Extra Sw.
Switches:
DR-ai (roll)
DR-el
(pitch)
DR-ru
(yaw)
CS/DTC
(Direct Throttle)
Throttle-cut
|Slot
´Sum
¶¶Interval
Mix-1
Mix-2
Mix-3
Teacher
Main phase
(auto-rotation)
Phases 1-3
Extra Sw.
---
---
---
---
---
---
E '
---
---
---
‡ #
F #
---
L #
L #
L #
N #
H „
---
F '
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
ROYAL
pro
108
22.2. Pre-set mixers
This table contains definitions of all the pre-defined mixers provided by the ROYAL
pro
. The following are listed:
x the name of the mixer
x the mixer inputs
x the mixer input switch
x the symbol for the mixer input’s method of working
Elevator compensation mixers for cruciform and T-tail
¡D
D
efine mixer
¨Exit
Name ELEVATR+
1 Elevator ON š
2 Spoiler ON œ
3 Flap ON š
4 Thr -Tr ON ›-
5 ------- ---- ---
Elevator compensation mixers for V-tail
¡D
D
efine mixer
¨Exit
Name V-TAIL+
1 Elevator ON š
2 Rudder ON š2
3 Spoiler ON œ
4 Flap ON š
5 Thr -Tr ON ›-
Delta mixer with throttle compensation input
¡D
D
efine mixer
¨Exit
Name DELTA+
1 Aileron ON ™2
2 Elevator ON š
3 Thr -Tr ON ›-
4 ------- ---- ---
5 ------- ---- ---
Mixer for outboard flaps (ailerons), four-flap model
¡D
D
efine mixer
¨Exit
Name AILERON+
1 Aileron ON ™2
2 Spoiler ON ›+
3 Flap ON š
4 Ele -Tr Mx1 š
5 -------- ---- ---
Mixer for inboard flaps (Flap), four-flap model
¡D
D
efine mixer
¨Exit
Name FLAP+
1 Flap ON š
2 Spoiler ON ›+
3 Aileron ON š2
4 Ele -Tr Mx1 š
5 -------- ---- ---
Manual
109
23. Care and maintenance
The transmitter requires no special maintenance.
However, we strongly recommend that you have the
system checked by an authorised MULTIPLEX Ser-
vice Centre at regular intervals (every two or three
years), depending on the intensity of use. Regular
checks of working systems and range (Î 3.2.) are, of
course, mandatory.
The best method of removing dust and dirt is to use a
soft bristle brush. Stubborn soiling, especially grease
and oil, is best tackled with a moist cloth, using a mild
household cleaner if necessary. Never use powerful
cleaning agents such as white spirit or other solvent.
Avoid subjecting the transmitter to pressure and shock
loads. The transmitter should always be stored and
transported in a suitable container (case or bag).
At regular intervals check that the transmitter case,
mechanical parts and - especially - the wiring and
contacts are in good condition.
! Switch the transmitter OFF before opening the
case, and disconnect the battery before working
on it. Avoid touching electrical components and
circuit boards.
24. Disposal
Electrical equipment marked with the crossed-
out refuse bin must not be discarded in the
household waste; it must be taken to a suitable
collection point for proper disposal.
In the countries of the EU (European Union) it is
illegal to dispose of electrical apparatus via the do-
mestic waste system (WEEE - Waste of Electrical and
Electronic Equipment Directive 2002/96/EG). You can
take your unwanted equipment to your local public
collection poit (e.g. recycling centre), which will dis-
pose of it in the correct manner at no cost to you.
By recycling your unwanted equipment you can make
an important contribution to the protection of the en-
vironment.
25. Advice and Service
We have taken great trouble to write and arrange
these operating instructions in such a way that you
can find an answer to every question quickly and eas-
ily. However, if you still have queries regarding your
ROYAL
pro
, please contact your local model shop in
the first instance, where you will find expert advice
freely given.
The addresses of our Service Centres abroad can be
found on the website:
www.multiplex-rc.de
under
CONTACT / SERVICE PARTNERS
… 16 …

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Multiplex ROYALevo9 bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Multiplex ROYALevo9 in de taal/talen: Nederlands als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 2,53 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Andere handleiding(en) van Multiplex ROYALevo9

Multiplex ROYALevo9 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Deutsch - 58 pagina's

Multiplex ROYALevo9 Gebruiksaanwijzing - English - 58 pagina's


Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info